acmart (21apr19)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@50968 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

27 files changed, 5183 insertions, 1562 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/README
index 538a730c8d8..7c37d4b61d2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/README
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/README
@@ -215,3 +215,7 @@ Version 1.57    Change of \baselinestretch now produces an error
 Version 1.58    Suppressed spurious warnings.
 		New journal:  HEALTH.
 		TDSCI is renamed to TDS.
+
+Version 1.59    Now a journal format can be used for conference proceedings
+		All samples are now generated from the same .dtx file
+		Bug fixes
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/acmart.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/acmart.pdf
index 8d92a5adc5a..23ddaab8eba 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/acmart.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/acmart.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/acmguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/acmguide.pdf
index 11b052a846e..a073dd0c522 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/acmguide.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/acmguide.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmlarge.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmlarge.pdf
index fe83ca5cc63..cc17cf44c55 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmlarge.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmlarge.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmlarge.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmlarge.tex
index 9db49a3ef79..c2f2c7eb775 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmlarge.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmlarge.tex
@@ -1,59 +1,88 @@
-%
-% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
-\documentclass[acmlarge,screen]{acmart}
-
-%
-% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+%%
+%% This is file `sample-acmlarge.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% samples.dtx  (with options: `acmlarge')
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from sample-acmlarge.tex.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file samples.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%%
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+\documentclass[acmlarge]{acmart}
+
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
 \AtBeginDocument{%
   \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
     \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
 
-% Rights management information. 
-% This information is sent to you when you complete the rights form.
-% These commands have SAMPLE values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
-% the commands and values with those provided to you when you complete the rights form.
-%
-% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
 \copyrightyear{2018}
 \acmYear{2018}
-\setcopyright{acmlicensed}
-\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
-\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection, June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
-\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-\acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
-
-%
-% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
-%\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
-%\acmJournal{TOG}
-%\acmYear{2018}\acmVolume{37}\acmNumber{4}\acmArticle{111}\acmMonth{8}
-%\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-
-%
-% Submission ID. 
-% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
-% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
-%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
-
-%
-% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and references. If you are preparing content for an event
-% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of citations and references. Uncommenting
-% the next command will enable that style.
-%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
-
-%
-% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+
+
+%%
+%% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
+\acmJournal{POMACS}
+\acmVolume{37}
+\acmNumber{4}
+\acmArticle{111}
+\acmMonth{8}
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID.
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
+%% Uncommenting
+%% the next command will enable that style.
+%%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
 \begin{document}
 
-%
-% The "title" command has an optional parameter, allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
 \title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
 
-%
-% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define the authors and their affiliations.
-% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
-% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
 \author{Ben Trovato}
 \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
 \email{trovato@corporation.com}
@@ -91,7 +120,7 @@
  \city{Doimukh}
  \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
  \country{India}}
- 
+
 \author{Huifen Chan}
 \affiliation{%
   \institution{Tsinghua University}
@@ -117,25 +146,30 @@
 \affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
 \email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
 
-%
-% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
-% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows the author to define a more concise list
-% of authors' names for this purpose.
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
 \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
 
-%
-% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the article.
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article.
 \begin{abstract}
-A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an article formatted for publication by ACM in 
-a conference proceedings or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this article presents
-and explains many of the common variations, as well as many of the formatting elements
-an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \end{abstract}
 
-%
-% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
-% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
-%
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
 \begin{CCSXML}
 <ccs2012>
  <concept>
@@ -166,46 +200,61 @@ an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
 \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
 
-%
-% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe the work being
-% presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
 \keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
 
-%
-% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation information and the body 
-% of the document, and typically spans the page. 
-%%\begin{teaserfigure}
-%%  \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
-%%  \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
-%%  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
-%%  \label{fig:teaser}
-%%\end{teaserfigure}
-
-%
-% This command processes the author and affiliation and title information and builds
-% the first part of the formatted document.
+
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
 \maketitle
 
 \section{Introduction}
-ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique features incorporated into this single new template.
-
-If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
-
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the author's own version, with {\it very} few changes to the source. 
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
 
 \section{Template Overview}
-As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready'' journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by selecting the appropriate {\it template style} and {\it template parameters}.
-
-This document will explain the major features of the document class. For further information, the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is available from \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
 
 \subsection{Template Styles}
 
-The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is the {\it template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
 \item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
@@ -222,96 +271,169 @@ The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf
 
 \subsection{Template Parameters}
 
-In addition to specifying the {\it template style} to be used in formatting your work, there are a number of {\it template parameters} which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list of these parameters can be found in the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
 
 Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
 \begin{itemize}
-\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind'' conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
-\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable for posting by the author.
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
 \item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
 \end{itemize}
 
-This document uses the following string as the first command in the source file: \verb|\documentclass[sigconf,screen]{acmart}|.
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+\verb|\documentclass[acmlarge]{acmart}|.
 
 \section{Modifications}
 
-Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions, and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
 
-{\bf Your document will be returned to you for revision if modifications are discovered.}
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
 
 \section{Typefaces}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the ``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The ``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used, as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
 
 \section{Title Information}
 
-The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately - \url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the {\verb|subtitle|} command.
-Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
 
-If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title| command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \title[short title]{full title}
 \end{verbatim}
 
 \section{Authors and Affiliations}
 
-Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors' names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
 
-Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
   \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
   \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors of an article contributed equally to the work. 
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
 
-If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
 \end{verbatim}
-Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the page headers.
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
 
-The article template's documentation, available at  \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective use.
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
 
 \section{Rights Information}
 
-Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission, license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
-
-Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final document:
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
 \item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
 \item the conference information in the page header(s).
 \end{itemize}
 
-Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with each of the works.
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
 
 \section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
 
-Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online search. 
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
 
-The ACM Computing Classification System --- \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of classifiers and concepts that describe the computing discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source. 
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
 
-User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing the research being presented.
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
 
-CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts. 
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
 
 \section{Sectioning Commands}
 
-Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands: \verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and \verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering from the commands. 
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
 
-Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bf not allowed.}
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
 
 \section{Tables}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|'' package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing high-quality tables. 
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
 
-Table captions are placed {\it above} the table.
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
 
-Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the \textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again, detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
 
-Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
 
 \begin{table}
   \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
@@ -328,7 +450,14 @@ Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} i
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}
 
-To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
 
 \begin{table*}
   \caption{Some Typical Commands}
@@ -346,20 +475,18 @@ To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, us
 
 \section{Math Equations}
 You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
-inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of
-the three are discussed in the next sections.
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
 
 \subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
-A formula that appears in the running text is called an
-inline or in-text formula.  It is produced by the
-\textbf{math} environment, which can be
-invoked with the usual \texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end}
-construction or with the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You
-can use any of the symbols and structures,
-from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
-\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a
-few examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how
-this equation:
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
 \begin{math}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{math},
@@ -372,10 +499,10 @@ text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
 environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
 \textbf{displaymath} environment.
 
-Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols
-and structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just
-give a couple of examples of display equations in context.
-First, consider the equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
 \begin{equation}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{equation}
@@ -393,21 +520,33 @@ just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
 
 \section{Figures}
 
-The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown in the example below.
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
 \begin{figure}[h]
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
-  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \& Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
   \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
 \end{figure}
 
-Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should {\bf also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
 
-Figure captions are placed {\it below} the figure.
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
 
 \subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
 
-A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a figure in your article, place the command immediately before the \verb|\maketitle| command:
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \begin{teaserfigure}
     \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
@@ -418,27 +557,67 @@ A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed
 
 \section{Citations and Bibliographies}
 
-The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete --- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials (``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages, article DOI, etc. 
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
 
-The bibliography is included in your source document with these two commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
   \bibliography{bibfile}
 \end{verbatim}
-where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|'' suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
-
-Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the ``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this command in the {\bf preamble} (before ``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source: 
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
-\cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
-a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference, symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article) \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis: \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1) \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles) \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton: multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A couple of citations with DOIs: \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
 
 \section{Acknowledgments}
 
-Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment section, which is placed just before the reference section in your document. 
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
 
 This section has a special environment:
 \begin{verbatim}
@@ -446,59 +625,89 @@ This section has a special environment:
   ...
   \end{acks}
 \end{verbatim}
-so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure consistency in the spelling of the section heading. 
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
 
 Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
 
 \section{Appendices}
 
-If your work needs an appendix, add it before the ``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source document. 
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
 
 Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \appendix
 \end{verbatim}
-and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section and subsection identification method.
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
 
 \section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
 
-The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in the margin:
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
 \item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
 \item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
 \end{itemize}
 
-%
-% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures
-% the proper identification of the section in the article metadata, and the consistent spelling of the heading.
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
 \begin{acks}
 To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
 \end{acks}
 
-%
-% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and the bibliography file.
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
 \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
 \bibliography{sample-base}
 
-% 
-% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+%%
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
 \appendix
 
 \section{Research Methods}
 
 \subsection{Part One}
 
-Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper. 
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
 
 \subsection{Part Two}
 
-Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis. 
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
 
 \section{Online Resources}
 
-Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum. 
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
 
-Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar massa et mattis lacinia.
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
 
 \end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sample-acmlarge.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall-conf.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall-conf.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6c46a43556b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall-conf.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall-conf.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall-conf.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ab7d0ad0735
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall-conf.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,723 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `sample-acmsmall-conf.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% samples.dtx  (with options: `acmsmall-conf')
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from sample-acmsmall-conf.tex.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file samples.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%%
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+\documentclass[acmsmall]{acmart}
+
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
+    \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
+
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
+\copyrightyear{2018}
+\acmYear{2018}
+\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
+
+%% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural
+  Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
+\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection,
+  June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
+\acmPrice{15.00}
+\acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
+
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID.
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
+%% Uncommenting
+%% the next command will enable that style.
+%%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+\begin{document}
+
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+\title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
+
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+\author{Ben Trovato}
+\authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
+\email{trovato@corporation.com}
+\orcid{1234-5678-9012}
+\author{G.K.M. Tobin}
+\authornotemark[1]
+\email{webmaster@marysville-ohio.com}
+\affiliation{%
+  \institution{Institute for Clarity in Documentation}
+  \streetaddress{P.O. Box 1212}
+  \city{Dublin}
+  \state{Ohio}
+  \postcode{43017-6221}
+}
+
+\author{Lars Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld}
+\affiliation{%
+  \institution{The Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Group}
+  \streetaddress{1 Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Circle}
+  \city{Hekla}
+  \country{Iceland}}
+\email{larst@affiliation.org}
+
+\author{Valerie B\'eranger}
+\affiliation{%
+  \institution{Inria Paris-Rocquencourt}
+  \city{Rocquencourt}
+  \country{France}
+}
+
+\author{Aparna Patel}
+\affiliation{%
+ \institution{Rajiv Gandhi University}
+ \streetaddress{Rono-Hills}
+ \city{Doimukh}
+ \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
+ \country{India}}
+
+\author{Huifen Chan}
+\affiliation{%
+  \institution{Tsinghua University}
+  \streetaddress{30 Shuangqing Rd}
+  \city{Haidian Qu}
+  \state{Beijing Shi}
+  \country{China}}
+
+\author{Charles Palmer}
+\affiliation{%
+  \institution{Palmer Research Laboratories}
+  \streetaddress{8600 Datapoint Drive}
+  \city{San Antonio}
+  \state{Texas}
+  \postcode{78229}}
+\email{cpalmer@prl.com}
+
+\author{John Smith}
+\affiliation{\institution{The Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Group}}
+\email{jsmith@affiliation.org}
+
+\author{Julius P. Kumquat}
+\affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
+\email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
+
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
+\renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
+
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article.
+\begin{abstract}
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
+\end{abstract}
+
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
+\begin{CCSXML}
+<ccs2012>
+ <concept>
+  <concept_id>10010520.10010553.10010562</concept_id>
+  <concept_desc>Computer systems organization~Embedded systems</concept_desc>
+  <concept_significance>500</concept_significance>
+ </concept>
+ <concept>
+  <concept_id>10010520.10010575.10010755</concept_id>
+  <concept_desc>Computer systems organization~Redundancy</concept_desc>
+  <concept_significance>300</concept_significance>
+ </concept>
+ <concept>
+  <concept_id>10010520.10010553.10010554</concept_id>
+  <concept_desc>Computer systems organization~Robotics</concept_desc>
+  <concept_significance>100</concept_significance>
+ </concept>
+ <concept>
+  <concept_id>10003033.10003083.10003095</concept_id>
+  <concept_desc>Networks~Network reliability</concept_desc>
+  <concept_significance>100</concept_significance>
+ </concept>
+</ccs2012>
+\end{CCSXML}
+
+\ccsdesc[500]{Computer systems organization~Embedded systems}
+\ccsdesc[300]{Computer systems organization~Redundancy}
+\ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
+\ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
+
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+\keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
+
+%% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation
+%% information and the body of the document, and typically spans the
+%% page.
+\begin{teaserfigure}
+  \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
+  \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
+  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base
+  seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
+  \label{fig:teaser}
+\end{teaserfigure}
+
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Introduction}
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
+
+\section{Template Overview}
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+
+\subsection{Template Styles}
+
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
+\item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
+\item {\verb|acmtog|}: Used by TOG.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf|} template style.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item {\verb|acmconf|}: The default proceedings template style.
+\item{\verb|sigchi|}: Used for SIGCHI conference articles.
+\item{\verb|sigchi-a|}: Used for SIGCHI ``Extended Abstract'' articles.
+\item{\verb|sigplan|}: Used for SIGPLAN conference articles.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Template Parameters}
+
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+
+Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
+\item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
+\end{itemize}
+
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+\verb|\documentclass[acmsmall]{acmart}|.
+
+\section{Modifications}
+
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
+
+\section{Typefaces}
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+
+\section{Title Information}
+
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \title[short title]{full title}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Authors and Affiliations}
+
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
+  \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
+  \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
+
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
+\end{verbatim}
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
+
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
+
+\section{Rights Information}
+
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
+\item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
+\item the conference information in the page header(s).
+\end{itemize}
+
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
+
+\section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
+
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
+
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
+
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
+
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
+
+\section{Sectioning Commands}
+
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
+
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
+
+\section{Tables}
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
+
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
+
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
+
+\begin{table}
+  \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
+  \label{tab:freq}
+  \begin{tabular}{ccl}
+    \toprule
+    Non-English or Math&Frequency&Comments\\
+    \midrule
+    \O & 1 in 1,000& For Swedish names\\
+    $\pi$ & 1 in 5& Common in math\\
+    \$ & 4 in 5 & Used in business\\
+    $\Psi^2_1$ & 1 in 40,000& Unexplained usage\\
+  \bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
+
+\begin{table*}
+  \caption{Some Typical Commands}
+  \label{tab:commands}
+  \begin{tabular}{ccl}
+    \toprule
+    Command &A Number & Comments\\
+    \midrule
+    \texttt{{\char'134}author} & 100& Author \\
+    \texttt{{\char'134}table}& 300 & For tables\\
+    \texttt{{\char'134}table*}& 400& For wider tables\\
+    \bottomrule
+  \end{tabular}
+\end{table*}
+
+\section{Math Equations}
+You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
+
+\subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
+\begin{math}
+  \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
+\end{math},
+set here in in-line math style, looks slightly different when
+set in display style.  (See next section).
+
+\subsection{Display Equations}
+A numbered display equation---one set off by vertical space from the
+text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
+environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
+\textbf{displaymath} environment.
+
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+\begin{equation}
+  \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
+\end{equation}
+Notice how it is formatted somewhat differently in
+the \textbf{displaymath}
+environment.  Now, we'll enter an unnumbered equation:
+\begin{displaymath}
+  \sum_{i=0}^{\infty} x + 1
+\end{displaymath}
+and follow it with another numbered equation:
+\begin{equation}
+  \sum_{i=0}^{\infty}x_i=\int_{0}^{\pi+2} f
+\end{equation}
+just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
+
+\section{Figures}
+
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
+\begin{figure}[h]
+  \centering
+  \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
+\end{figure}
+
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
+
+\subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
+
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \begin{teaserfigure}
+    \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
+    \caption{figure caption}
+    \Description{figure description}
+  \end{teaserfigure}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Citations and Bibliographies}
+
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
+
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
+  \bibliography{bibfile}
+\end{verbatim}
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+
+\section{Acknowledgments}
+
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
+
+This section has a special environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \begin{acks}
+  ...
+  \end{acks}
+\end{verbatim}
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
+
+Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
+
+\section{Appendices}
+
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
+
+Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \appendix
+\end{verbatim}
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
+
+\section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
+
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
+\item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
+\item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
+\begin{acks}
+To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
+\end{acks}
+
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
+\bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
+\bibliography{sample-base}
+
+%%
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+\appendix
+
+\section{Research Methods}
+
+\subsection{Part One}
+
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
+
+\subsection{Part Two}
+
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
+
+\section{Online Resources}
+
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
+
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
+
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sample-acmsmall-conf.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall.pdf
index 5967c7226cd..6307991baea 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall.tex
index 3fcc200b656..3d52710c8ed 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmsmall.tex
@@ -1,59 +1,88 @@
-%
-% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+%%
+%% This is file `sample-acmsmall.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% samples.dtx  (with options: `acmsmall')
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from sample-acmsmall.tex.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file samples.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%%
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
 \documentclass[acmsmall]{acmart}
 
-%
-% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
 \AtBeginDocument{%
   \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
     \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
 
-% Rights management information. 
-% This information is sent to you when you complete the rights form.
-% These commands have SAMPLE values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
-% the commands and values with those provided to you when you complete the rights form.
-%
-% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
 \copyrightyear{2018}
 \acmYear{2018}
-\setcopyright{acmlicensed}
-\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
-\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection, June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
-\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-\acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
-
-%
-% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
-%\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
-%\acmJournal{TOG}
-%\acmYear{2018}\acmVolume{37}\acmNumber{4}\acmArticle{111}\acmMonth{8}
-%\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-
-%
-% Submission ID. 
-% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
-% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
-%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
-
-%
-% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and references. If you are preparing content for an event
-% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of citations and references. Uncommenting
-% the next command will enable that style.
-%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
-
-%
-% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+
+
+%%
+%% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
+\acmJournal{JACM}
+\acmVolume{37}
+\acmNumber{4}
+\acmArticle{111}
+\acmMonth{8}
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID.
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
+%% Uncommenting
+%% the next command will enable that style.
+%%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
 \begin{document}
 
-%
-% The "title" command has an optional parameter, allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
 \title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
 
-%
-% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define the authors and their affiliations.
-% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
-% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
 \author{Ben Trovato}
 \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
 \email{trovato@corporation.com}
@@ -91,7 +120,7 @@
  \city{Doimukh}
  \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
  \country{India}}
- 
+
 \author{Huifen Chan}
 \affiliation{%
   \institution{Tsinghua University}
@@ -117,25 +146,30 @@
 \affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
 \email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
 
-%
-% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
-% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows the author to define a more concise list
-% of authors' names for this purpose.
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
 \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
 
-%
-% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the article.
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article.
 \begin{abstract}
-A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an article formatted for publication by ACM in 
-a conference proceedings or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this article presents
-and explains many of the common variations, as well as many of the formatting elements
-an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \end{abstract}
 
-%
-% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
-% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
-%
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
 \begin{CCSXML}
 <ccs2012>
  <concept>
@@ -166,46 +200,61 @@ an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
 \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
 
-%
-% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe the work being
-% presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
 \keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
 
-%
-% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation information and the body 
-% of the document, and typically spans the page. 
-%%\begin{teaserfigure}
-%%  \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
-%%  \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
-%%  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
-%%  \label{fig:teaser}
-%%\end{teaserfigure}
-
-%
-% This command processes the author and affiliation and title information and builds
-% the first part of the formatted document.
+
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
 \maketitle
 
 \section{Introduction}
-ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique features incorporated into this single new template.
-
-If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
-
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the author's own version, with {\it very} few changes to the source. 
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
 
 \section{Template Overview}
-As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready'' journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by selecting the appropriate {\it template style} and {\it template parameters}.
-
-This document will explain the major features of the document class. For further information, the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is available from \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
 
 \subsection{Template Styles}
 
-The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is the {\it template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
 \item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
@@ -222,96 +271,169 @@ The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf
 
 \subsection{Template Parameters}
 
-In addition to specifying the {\it template style} to be used in formatting your work, there are a number of {\it template parameters} which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list of these parameters can be found in the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
 
 Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
 \begin{itemize}
-\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind'' conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
-\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable for posting by the author.
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
 \item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
 \end{itemize}
 
-This document uses the following string as the first command in the source file: \verb|\documentclass[sigconf,screen]{acmart}|.
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+\verb|\documentclass[acmsmall]{acmart}|.
 
 \section{Modifications}
 
-Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions, and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
 
-{\bf Your document will be returned to you for revision if modifications are discovered.}
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
 
 \section{Typefaces}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the ``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The ``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used, as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
 
 \section{Title Information}
 
-The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately - \url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the {\verb|subtitle|} command.
-Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
 
-If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title| command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \title[short title]{full title}
 \end{verbatim}
 
 \section{Authors and Affiliations}
 
-Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors' names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
 
-Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
   \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
   \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors of an article contributed equally to the work. 
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
 
-If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
 \end{verbatim}
-Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the page headers.
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
 
-The article template's documentation, available at  \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective use.
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
 
 \section{Rights Information}
 
-Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission, license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
-
-Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final document:
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
 \item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
 \item the conference information in the page header(s).
 \end{itemize}
 
-Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with each of the works.
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
 
 \section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
 
-Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online search. 
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
 
-The ACM Computing Classification System --- \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of classifiers and concepts that describe the computing discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source. 
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
 
-User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing the research being presented.
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
 
-CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts. 
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
 
 \section{Sectioning Commands}
 
-Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands: \verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and \verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering from the commands. 
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
 
-Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bf not allowed.}
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
 
 \section{Tables}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|'' package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing high-quality tables. 
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
 
-Table captions are placed {\it above} the table.
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
 
-Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the \textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again, detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
 
-Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
 
 \begin{table}
   \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
@@ -328,7 +450,14 @@ Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} i
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}
 
-To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
 
 \begin{table*}
   \caption{Some Typical Commands}
@@ -346,20 +475,18 @@ To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, us
 
 \section{Math Equations}
 You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
-inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of
-the three are discussed in the next sections.
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
 
 \subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
-A formula that appears in the running text is called an
-inline or in-text formula.  It is produced by the
-\textbf{math} environment, which can be
-invoked with the usual \texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end}
-construction or with the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You
-can use any of the symbols and structures,
-from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
-\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a
-few examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how
-this equation:
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
 \begin{math}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{math},
@@ -372,10 +499,10 @@ text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
 environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
 \textbf{displaymath} environment.
 
-Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols
-and structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just
-give a couple of examples of display equations in context.
-First, consider the equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
 \begin{equation}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{equation}
@@ -393,21 +520,33 @@ just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
 
 \section{Figures}
 
-The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown in the example below.
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
 \begin{figure}[h]
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
-  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \& Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
   \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
 \end{figure}
 
-Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should {\bf also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
 
-Figure captions are placed {\it below} the figure.
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
 
 \subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
 
-A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a figure in your article, place the command immediately before the \verb|\maketitle| command:
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \begin{teaserfigure}
     \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
@@ -418,27 +557,67 @@ A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed
 
 \section{Citations and Bibliographies}
 
-The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete --- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials (``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages, article DOI, etc. 
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
 
-The bibliography is included in your source document with these two commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
   \bibliography{bibfile}
 \end{verbatim}
-where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|'' suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
-
-Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the ``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this command in the {\bf preamble} (before ``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source: 
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
-\cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
-a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference, symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article) \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis: \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1) \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles) \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton: multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A couple of citations with DOIs: \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
 
 \section{Acknowledgments}
 
-Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment section, which is placed just before the reference section in your document. 
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
 
 This section has a special environment:
 \begin{verbatim}
@@ -446,59 +625,89 @@ This section has a special environment:
   ...
   \end{acks}
 \end{verbatim}
-so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure consistency in the spelling of the section heading. 
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
 
 Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
 
 \section{Appendices}
 
-If your work needs an appendix, add it before the ``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source document. 
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
 
 Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \appendix
 \end{verbatim}
-and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section and subsection identification method.
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
 
 \section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
 
-The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in the margin:
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
 \item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
 \item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
 \end{itemize}
 
-%
-% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures
-% the proper identification of the section in the article metadata, and the consistent spelling of the heading.
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
 \begin{acks}
 To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
 \end{acks}
 
-%
-% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and the bibliography file.
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
 \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
 \bibliography{sample-base}
 
-% 
-% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+%%
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
 \appendix
 
 \section{Research Methods}
 
 \subsection{Part One}
 
-Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper. 
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
 
 \subsection{Part Two}
 
-Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis. 
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
 
 \section{Online Resources}
 
-Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum. 
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
 
-Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar massa et mattis lacinia.
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
 
 \end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sample-acmsmall.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmtog.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmtog.pdf
index ecea961d76b..9ba3ffbe33e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmtog.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmtog.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmtog.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmtog.tex
index e9c0f336e54..ffa71181803 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmtog.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-acmtog.tex
@@ -1,59 +1,86 @@
-%
-% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+%%
+%% This is file `sample-acmtog.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% samples.dtx  (with options: `acmtog')
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from sample-acmtog.tex.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file samples.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%%
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
 \documentclass[acmtog]{acmart}
 
-%
-% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
 \AtBeginDocument{%
   \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
     \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
 
-% Rights management information. 
-% This information is sent to you when you complete the rights form.
-% These commands have SAMPLE values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
-% the commands and values with those provided to you when you complete the rights form.
-%
-% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
 \copyrightyear{2018}
 \acmYear{2018}
-\setcopyright{acmlicensed}
-\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
-\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection, June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
-\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-\acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
-
-%
-% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
-%\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
-%\acmJournal{TOG}
-%\acmYear{2018}\acmVolume{37}\acmNumber{4}\acmArticle{111}\acmMonth{8}
-%\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-
-%
-% Submission ID. 
-% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
-% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
-%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
-
-%
-% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and references. If you are preparing content for an event
-% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of citations and references. Uncommenting
-% the next command will enable that style.
+
+
+%%
+%% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
+\acmJournal{TOG}
+\acmVolume{37}
+\acmNumber{4}
+\acmArticle{111}
+\acmMonth{8}
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID.
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
 \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
 
-%
-% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
 \begin{document}
 
-%
-% The "title" command has an optional parameter, allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
 \title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
 
-%
-% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define the authors and their affiliations.
-% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
-% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
 \author{Ben Trovato}
 \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
 \email{trovato@corporation.com}
@@ -91,7 +118,7 @@
  \city{Doimukh}
  \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
  \country{India}}
- 
+
 \author{Huifen Chan}
 \affiliation{%
   \institution{Tsinghua University}
@@ -117,25 +144,30 @@
 \affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
 \email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
 
-%
-% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
-% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows the author to define a more concise list
-% of authors' names for this purpose.
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
 \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
 
-%
-% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the article.
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article.
 \begin{abstract}
-A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an article formatted for publication by ACM in 
-a conference proceedings or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this article presents
-and explains many of the common variations, as well as many of the formatting elements
-an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \end{abstract}
 
-%
-% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
-% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
-%
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
 \begin{CCSXML}
 <ccs2012>
  <concept>
@@ -166,46 +198,61 @@ an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
 \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
 
-%
-% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe the work being
-% presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
 \keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
 
-%
-% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation information and the body 
-% of the document, and typically spans the page. 
-%%\begin{teaserfigure}
-%%  \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
-%%  \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
-%%  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
-%%  \label{fig:teaser}
-%%\end{teaserfigure}
-
-%
-% This command processes the author and affiliation and title information and builds
-% the first part of the formatted document.
+
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
 \maketitle
 
 \section{Introduction}
-ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique features incorporated into this single new template.
-
-If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
-
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the author's own version, with {\it very} few changes to the source. 
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
 
 \section{Template Overview}
-As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready'' journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by selecting the appropriate {\it template style} and {\it template parameters}.
-
-This document will explain the major features of the document class. For further information, the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is available from \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
 
 \subsection{Template Styles}
 
-The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is the {\it template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
 \item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
@@ -222,96 +269,169 @@ The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf
 
 \subsection{Template Parameters}
 
-In addition to specifying the {\it template style} to be used in formatting your work, there are a number of {\it template parameters} which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list of these parameters can be found in the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
 
 Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
 \begin{itemize}
-\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind'' conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
-\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable for posting by the author.
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
 \item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
 \end{itemize}
 
-This document uses the following string as the first command in the source file: \verb|\documentclass[sigconf,screen]{acmart}|.
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+\verb|\documentclass[acmtog]{acmart}|.
 
 \section{Modifications}
 
-Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions, and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
 
-{\bf Your document will be returned to you for revision if modifications are discovered.}
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
 
 \section{Typefaces}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the ``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The ``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used, as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
 
 \section{Title Information}
 
-The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately - \url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the {\verb|subtitle|} command.
-Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
 
-If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title| command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \title[short title]{full title}
 \end{verbatim}
 
 \section{Authors and Affiliations}
 
-Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors' names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
 
-Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
   \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
   \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors of an article contributed equally to the work. 
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
 
-If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
 \end{verbatim}
-Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the page headers.
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
 
-The article template's documentation, available at  \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective use.
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
 
 \section{Rights Information}
 
-Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission, license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
-
-Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final document:
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
 \item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
 \item the conference information in the page header(s).
 \end{itemize}
 
-Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with each of the works.
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
 
 \section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
 
-Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online search. 
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
 
-The ACM Computing Classification System --- \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of classifiers and concepts that describe the computing discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source. 
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
 
-User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing the research being presented.
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
 
-CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts. 
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
 
 \section{Sectioning Commands}
 
-Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands: \verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and \verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering from the commands. 
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
 
-Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bf not allowed.}
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
 
 \section{Tables}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|'' package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing high-quality tables. 
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
 
-Table captions are placed {\it above} the table.
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
 
-Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the \textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again, detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
 
-Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
 
 \begin{table}
   \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
@@ -328,7 +448,14 @@ Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} i
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}
 
-To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
 
 \begin{table*}
   \caption{Some Typical Commands}
@@ -346,20 +473,18 @@ To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, us
 
 \section{Math Equations}
 You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
-inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of
-the three are discussed in the next sections.
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
 
 \subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
-A formula that appears in the running text is called an
-inline or in-text formula.  It is produced by the
-\textbf{math} environment, which can be
-invoked with the usual \texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end}
-construction or with the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You
-can use any of the symbols and structures,
-from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
-\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a
-few examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how
-this equation:
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
 \begin{math}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{math},
@@ -372,10 +497,10 @@ text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
 environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
 \textbf{displaymath} environment.
 
-Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols
-and structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just
-give a couple of examples of display equations in context.
-First, consider the equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
 \begin{equation}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{equation}
@@ -393,21 +518,33 @@ just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
 
 \section{Figures}
 
-The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown in the example below.
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
 \begin{figure}[h]
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
-  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \& Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
   \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
 \end{figure}
 
-Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should {\bf also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
 
-Figure captions are placed {\it below} the figure.
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
 
 \subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
 
-A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a figure in your article, place the command immediately before the \verb|\maketitle| command:
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \begin{teaserfigure}
     \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
@@ -418,27 +555,67 @@ A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed
 
 \section{Citations and Bibliographies}
 
-The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete --- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials (``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages, article DOI, etc. 
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
 
-The bibliography is included in your source document with these two commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
   \bibliography{bibfile}
 \end{verbatim}
-where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|'' suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
-
-Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the ``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this command in the {\bf preamble} (before ``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source: 
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
-\cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
-a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference, symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article) \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis: \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1) \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles) \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton: multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A couple of citations with DOIs: \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
 
 \section{Acknowledgments}
 
-Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment section, which is placed just before the reference section in your document. 
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
 
 This section has a special environment:
 \begin{verbatim}
@@ -446,59 +623,89 @@ This section has a special environment:
   ...
   \end{acks}
 \end{verbatim}
-so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure consistency in the spelling of the section heading. 
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
 
 Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
 
 \section{Appendices}
 
-If your work needs an appendix, add it before the ``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source document. 
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
 
 Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \appendix
 \end{verbatim}
-and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section and subsection identification method.
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
 
 \section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
 
-The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in the margin:
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
 \item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
 \item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
 \end{itemize}
 
-%
-% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures
-% the proper identification of the section in the article metadata, and the consistent spelling of the heading.
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
 \begin{acks}
 To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
 \end{acks}
 
-%
-% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and the bibliography file.
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
 \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
 \bibliography{sample-base}
 
-% 
-% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+%%
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
 \appendix
 
 \section{Research Methods}
 
 \subsection{Part One}
 
-Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper. 
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
 
 \subsection{Part Two}
 
-Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis. 
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
 
 \section{Online Resources}
 
-Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum. 
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
 
-Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar massa et mattis lacinia.
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
 
 \end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sample-acmtog.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-authordraft.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-authordraft.pdf
index 85e20874b69..6db0d9f27bd 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-authordraft.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-authordraft.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-authordraft.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-authordraft.tex
index 83e6396c8c9..b4100a2cce3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-authordraft.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-authordraft.tex
@@ -1,59 +1,88 @@
-%
-% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+%%
+%% This is file `sample-authordraft.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% samples.dtx  (with options: `authordraft')
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from sample-authordraft.tex.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file samples.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%%
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
 \documentclass[sigconf,authordraft]{acmart}
 
-%
-% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
 \AtBeginDocument{%
   \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
     \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
 
-% Rights management information. 
-% This information is sent to you when you complete the rights form.
-% These commands have SAMPLE values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
-% the commands and values with those provided to you when you complete the rights form.
-%
-% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
 \copyrightyear{2018}
 \acmYear{2018}
-\setcopyright{acmlicensed}
-\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
-\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection, June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
-\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
+
+%% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural
+  Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
+\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection,
+  June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
+\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
 
-%
-% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
-%\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
-%\acmJournal{TOG}
-%\acmYear{2018}\acmVolume{37}\acmNumber{4}\acmArticle{111}\acmMonth{8}
-%\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-
-%
-% Submission ID. 
-% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
-% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
-%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
-
-%
-% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and references. If you are preparing content for an event
-% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of citations and references. Uncommenting
-% the next command will enable that style.
-%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
-
-%
-% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID.
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
+%% Uncommenting
+%% the next command will enable that style.
+%%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
 \begin{document}
 
-%
-% The "title" command has an optional parameter, allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
 \title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
 
-%
-% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define the authors and their affiliations.
-% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
-% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
 \author{Ben Trovato}
 \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
 \email{trovato@corporation.com}
@@ -91,7 +120,7 @@
  \city{Doimukh}
  \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
  \country{India}}
- 
+
 \author{Huifen Chan}
 \affiliation{%
   \institution{Tsinghua University}
@@ -117,25 +146,30 @@
 \affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
 \email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
 
-%
-% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
-% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows the author to define a more concise list
-% of authors' names for this purpose.
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
 \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
 
-%
-% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the article.
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article.
 \begin{abstract}
-A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an article formatted for publication by ACM in 
-a conference proceedings or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this article presents
-and explains many of the common variations, as well as many of the formatting elements
-an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \end{abstract}
 
-%
-% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
-% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
-%
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
 \begin{CCSXML}
 <ccs2012>
  <concept>
@@ -166,46 +200,71 @@ an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
 \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
 
-%
-% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe the work being
-% presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
 \keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
 
-%
-% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation information and the body 
-% of the document, and typically spans the page. 
+%% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation
+%% information and the body of the document, and typically spans the
+%% page.
 \begin{teaserfigure}
   \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
   \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
-  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
+  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base
+  seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
   \label{fig:teaser}
 \end{teaserfigure}
 
-%
-% This command processes the author and affiliation and title information and builds
-% the first part of the formatted document.
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
 \maketitle
 
 \section{Introduction}
-ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique features incorporated into this single new template.
-
-If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
-
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the author's own version, with {\it very} few changes to the source. 
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
 
 \section{Template Overview}
-As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready'' journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by selecting the appropriate {\it template style} and {\it template parameters}.
-
-This document will explain the major features of the document class. For further information, the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is available from \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
 
 \subsection{Template Styles}
 
-The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is the {\it template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
 \item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
@@ -222,96 +281,169 @@ The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf
 
 \subsection{Template Parameters}
 
-In addition to specifying the {\it template style} to be used in formatting your work, there are a number of {\it template parameters} which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list of these parameters can be found in the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
 
 Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
 \begin{itemize}
-\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind'' conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
-\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable for posting by the author.
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
 \item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
 \end{itemize}
 
-This document uses the following string as the first command in the source file: \verb|\documentclass[sigconf,screen]{acmart}|.
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+\verb|\documentclass[sigconf,authordraft]{acmart}|.
 
 \section{Modifications}
 
-Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions, and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
 
-{\bf Your document will be returned to you for revision if modifications are discovered.}
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
 
 \section{Typefaces}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the ``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The ``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used, as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
 
 \section{Title Information}
 
-The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately - \url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the {\verb|subtitle|} command.
-Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
 
-If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title| command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \title[short title]{full title}
 \end{verbatim}
 
 \section{Authors and Affiliations}
 
-Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors' names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
 
-Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
   \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
   \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors of an article contributed equally to the work. 
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
 
-If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
 \end{verbatim}
-Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the page headers.
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
 
-The article template's documentation, available at  \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective use.
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
 
 \section{Rights Information}
 
-Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission, license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
-
-Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final document:
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
 \item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
 \item the conference information in the page header(s).
 \end{itemize}
 
-Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with each of the works.
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
 
 \section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
 
-Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online search. 
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
 
-The ACM Computing Classification System --- \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of classifiers and concepts that describe the computing discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source. 
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
 
-User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing the research being presented.
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
 
-CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts. 
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
 
 \section{Sectioning Commands}
 
-Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands: \verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and \verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering from the commands. 
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
 
-Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bf not allowed.}
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
 
 \section{Tables}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|'' package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing high-quality tables. 
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
 
-Table captions are placed {\it above} the table.
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
 
-Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the \textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again, detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
 
-Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
 
 \begin{table}
   \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
@@ -328,7 +460,14 @@ Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} i
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}
 
-To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
 
 \begin{table*}
   \caption{Some Typical Commands}
@@ -346,20 +485,18 @@ To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, us
 
 \section{Math Equations}
 You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
-inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of
-the three are discussed in the next sections.
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
 
 \subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
-A formula that appears in the running text is called an
-inline or in-text formula.  It is produced by the
-\textbf{math} environment, which can be
-invoked with the usual \texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end}
-construction or with the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You
-can use any of the symbols and structures,
-from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
-\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a
-few examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how
-this equation:
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
 \begin{math}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{math},
@@ -372,10 +509,10 @@ text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
 environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
 \textbf{displaymath} environment.
 
-Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols
-and structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just
-give a couple of examples of display equations in context.
-First, consider the equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
 \begin{equation}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{equation}
@@ -393,21 +530,33 @@ just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
 
 \section{Figures}
 
-The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown in the example below.
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
 \begin{figure}[h]
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
-  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \& Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
   \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
 \end{figure}
 
-Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should {\bf also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
 
-Figure captions are placed {\it below} the figure.
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
 
 \subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
 
-A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a figure in your article, place the command immediately before the \verb|\maketitle| command:
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \begin{teaserfigure}
     \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
@@ -418,27 +567,67 @@ A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed
 
 \section{Citations and Bibliographies}
 
-The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete --- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials (``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages, article DOI, etc. 
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
 
-The bibliography is included in your source document with these two commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
   \bibliography{bibfile}
 \end{verbatim}
-where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|'' suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
-
-Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the ``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this command in the {\bf preamble} (before ``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source: 
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
-\cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
-a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference, symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article) \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis: \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1) \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles) \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton: multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A couple of citations with DOIs: \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
 
 \section{Acknowledgments}
 
-Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment section, which is placed just before the reference section in your document. 
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
 
 This section has a special environment:
 \begin{verbatim}
@@ -446,59 +635,89 @@ This section has a special environment:
   ...
   \end{acks}
 \end{verbatim}
-so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure consistency in the spelling of the section heading. 
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
 
 Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
 
 \section{Appendices}
 
-If your work needs an appendix, add it before the ``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source document. 
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
 
 Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \appendix
 \end{verbatim}
-and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section and subsection identification method.
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
 
 \section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
 
-The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in the margin:
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
 \item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
 \item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
 \end{itemize}
 
-%
-% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures
-% the proper identification of the section in the article metadata, and the consistent spelling of the heading.
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
 \begin{acks}
 To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
 \end{acks}
 
-%
-% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and the bibliography file.
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
 \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
 \bibliography{sample-base}
 
-% 
-% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+%%
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
 \appendix
 
 \section{Research Methods}
 
 \subsection{Part One}
 
-Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper. 
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
 
 \subsection{Part Two}
 
-Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis. 
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
 
 \section{Online Resources}
 
-Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum. 
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
 
-Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar massa et mattis lacinia.
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
 
 \end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sample-authordraft.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-manuscript.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-manuscript.pdf
index d22ffc23900..d21e7eb4a16 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-manuscript.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-manuscript.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-manuscript.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-manuscript.tex
index 0b80dbbc3a5..94edd4a1d8a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-manuscript.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-manuscript.tex
@@ -1,59 +1,88 @@
-%
-% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+%%
+%% This is file `sample-manuscript.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% samples.dtx  (with options: `manuscript')
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from sample-manuscript.tex.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file samples.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%%
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
 \documentclass[manuscript,screen]{acmart}
 
-%
-% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
 \AtBeginDocument{%
   \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
     \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
 
-% Rights management information. 
-% This information is sent to you when you complete the rights form.
-% These commands have SAMPLE values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
-% the commands and values with those provided to you when you complete the rights form.
-%
-% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
 \copyrightyear{2018}
 \acmYear{2018}
-\setcopyright{acmlicensed}
-\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
-\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection, June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
-\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
+
+%% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural
+  Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
+\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection,
+  June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
+\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
 
-%
-% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
-%\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
-%\acmJournal{TOG}
-%\acmYear{2018}\acmVolume{37}\acmNumber{4}\acmArticle{111}\acmMonth{8}
-%\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-
-%
-% Submission ID. 
-% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
-% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
-%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
-
-%
-% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and references. If you are preparing content for an event
-% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of citations and references. Uncommenting
-% the next command will enable that style.
-%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
-
-%
-% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID.
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
+%% Uncommenting
+%% the next command will enable that style.
+%%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
 \begin{document}
 
-%
-% The "title" command has an optional parameter, allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
 \title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
 
-%
-% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define the authors and their affiliations.
-% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
-% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
 \author{Ben Trovato}
 \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
 \email{trovato@corporation.com}
@@ -91,7 +120,7 @@
  \city{Doimukh}
  \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
  \country{India}}
- 
+
 \author{Huifen Chan}
 \affiliation{%
   \institution{Tsinghua University}
@@ -117,25 +146,30 @@
 \affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
 \email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
 
-%
-% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
-% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows the author to define a more concise list
-% of authors' names for this purpose.
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
 \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
 
-%
-% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the article.
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article.
 \begin{abstract}
-A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an article formatted for publication by ACM in 
-a conference proceedings or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this article presents
-and explains many of the common variations, as well as many of the formatting elements
-an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \end{abstract}
 
-%
-% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
-% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
-%
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
 \begin{CCSXML}
 <ccs2012>
  <concept>
@@ -166,46 +200,61 @@ an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
 \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
 
-%
-% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe the work being
-% presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
 \keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
 
-%
-% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation information and the body 
-% of the document, and typically spans the page. 
-%%\begin{teaserfigure}
-%%  \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
-%%  \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
-%%  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
-%%  \label{fig:teaser}
-%%\end{teaserfigure}
-
-%
-% This command processes the author and affiliation and title information and builds
-% the first part of the formatted document.
+
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
 \maketitle
 
 \section{Introduction}
-ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique features incorporated into this single new template.
-
-If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
-
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the author's own version, with {\it very} few changes to the source. 
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
 
 \section{Template Overview}
-As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready'' journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by selecting the appropriate {\it template style} and {\it template parameters}.
-
-This document will explain the major features of the document class. For further information, the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is available from \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
 
 \subsection{Template Styles}
 
-The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is the {\it template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
 \item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
@@ -222,96 +271,169 @@ The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf
 
 \subsection{Template Parameters}
 
-In addition to specifying the {\it template style} to be used in formatting your work, there are a number of {\it template parameters} which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list of these parameters can be found in the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
 
 Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
 \begin{itemize}
-\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind'' conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
-\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable for posting by the author.
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
 \item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
 \end{itemize}
 
-This document uses the following string as the first command in the source file: \verb|\documentclass[sigconf,screen]{acmart}|.
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+\verb|\documentclass[manuscript,screen]{acmart}|.
 
 \section{Modifications}
 
-Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions, and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
 
-{\bf Your document will be returned to you for revision if modifications are discovered.}
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
 
 \section{Typefaces}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the ``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The ``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used, as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
 
 \section{Title Information}
 
-The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately - \url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the {\verb|subtitle|} command.
-Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
 
-If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title| command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \title[short title]{full title}
 \end{verbatim}
 
 \section{Authors and Affiliations}
 
-Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors' names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
 
-Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
   \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
   \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors of an article contributed equally to the work. 
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
 
-If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
 \end{verbatim}
-Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the page headers.
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
 
-The article template's documentation, available at  \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective use.
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
 
 \section{Rights Information}
 
-Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission, license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
-
-Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final document:
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
 \item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
 \item the conference information in the page header(s).
 \end{itemize}
 
-Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with each of the works.
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
 
 \section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
 
-Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online search. 
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
 
-The ACM Computing Classification System --- \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of classifiers and concepts that describe the computing discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source. 
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
 
-User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing the research being presented.
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
 
-CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts. 
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
 
 \section{Sectioning Commands}
 
-Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands: \verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and \verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering from the commands. 
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
 
-Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bf not allowed.}
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
 
 \section{Tables}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|'' package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing high-quality tables. 
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
 
-Table captions are placed {\it above} the table.
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
 
-Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the \textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again, detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
 
-Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
 
 \begin{table}
   \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
@@ -328,7 +450,14 @@ Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} i
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}
 
-To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
 
 \begin{table*}
   \caption{Some Typical Commands}
@@ -346,20 +475,18 @@ To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, us
 
 \section{Math Equations}
 You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
-inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of
-the three are discussed in the next sections.
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
 
 \subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
-A formula that appears in the running text is called an
-inline or in-text formula.  It is produced by the
-\textbf{math} environment, which can be
-invoked with the usual \texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end}
-construction or with the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You
-can use any of the symbols and structures,
-from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
-\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a
-few examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how
-this equation:
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
 \begin{math}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{math},
@@ -372,10 +499,10 @@ text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
 environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
 \textbf{displaymath} environment.
 
-Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols
-and structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just
-give a couple of examples of display equations in context.
-First, consider the equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
 \begin{equation}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{equation}
@@ -393,21 +520,33 @@ just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
 
 \section{Figures}
 
-The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown in the example below.
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
 \begin{figure}[h]
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
-  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \& Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
   \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
 \end{figure}
 
-Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should {\bf also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
 
-Figure captions are placed {\it below} the figure.
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
 
 \subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
 
-A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a figure in your article, place the command immediately before the \verb|\maketitle| command:
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \begin{teaserfigure}
     \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
@@ -418,27 +557,67 @@ A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed
 
 \section{Citations and Bibliographies}
 
-The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete --- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials (``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages, article DOI, etc. 
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
 
-The bibliography is included in your source document with these two commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
   \bibliography{bibfile}
 \end{verbatim}
-where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|'' suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
-
-Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the ``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this command in the {\bf preamble} (before ``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source: 
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
-\cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
-a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference, symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article) \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis: \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1) \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles) \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton: multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A couple of citations with DOIs: \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
 
 \section{Acknowledgments}
 
-Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment section, which is placed just before the reference section in your document. 
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
 
 This section has a special environment:
 \begin{verbatim}
@@ -446,59 +625,89 @@ This section has a special environment:
   ...
   \end{acks}
 \end{verbatim}
-so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure consistency in the spelling of the section heading. 
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
 
 Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
 
 \section{Appendices}
 
-If your work needs an appendix, add it before the ``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source document. 
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
 
 Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \appendix
 \end{verbatim}
-and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section and subsection identification method.
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
 
 \section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
 
-The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in the margin:
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
 \item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
 \item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
 \end{itemize}
 
-%
-% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures
-% the proper identification of the section in the article metadata, and the consistent spelling of the heading.
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
 \begin{acks}
 To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
 \end{acks}
 
-%
-% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and the bibliography file.
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
 \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
 \bibliography{sample-base}
 
-% 
-% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+%%
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
 \appendix
 
 \section{Research Methods}
 
 \subsection{Part One}
 
-Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper. 
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
 
 \subsection{Part Two}
 
-Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis. 
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
 
 \section{Online Resources}
 
-Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum. 
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
 
-Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar massa et mattis lacinia.
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
 
 \end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sample-manuscript.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi-a.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi-a.pdf
index c81423fb9c2..f19476663c0 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi-a.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi-a.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi-a.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi-a.tex
index 3c75c2c88ed..9a378c65a95 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi-a.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi-a.tex
@@ -1,59 +1,88 @@
-%
-% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+%%
+%% This is file `sample-sigchi-a.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% samples.dtx  (with options: `sigchi-a')
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from sample-sigchi-a.tex.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file samples.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%%
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
 \documentclass[sigchi-a]{acmart}
 
-%
-% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
 \AtBeginDocument{%
   \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
     \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
 
-% Rights management information. 
-% This information is sent to you when you complete the rights form.
-% These commands have SAMPLE values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
-% the commands and values with those provided to you when you complete the rights form.
-%
-% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
 \copyrightyear{2018}
 \acmYear{2018}
-\setcopyright{acmlicensed}
-\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
-\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection, June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
-\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
+
+%% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural
+  Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
+\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection,
+  June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
+\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
 
-%
-% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
-%\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
-%\acmJournal{TOG}
-%\acmYear{2018}\acmVolume{37}\acmNumber{4}\acmArticle{111}\acmMonth{8}
-%\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-
-%
-% Submission ID. 
-% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
-% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
-%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
-
-%
-% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and references. If you are preparing content for an event
-% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of citations and references. Uncommenting
-% the next command will enable that style.
-%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
-
-%
-% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID.
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
+%% Uncommenting
+%% the next command will enable that style.
+%%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
 \begin{document}
 
-%
-% The "title" command has an optional parameter, allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
 \title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
 
-%
-% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define the authors and their affiliations.
-% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
-% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
 \author{Ben Trovato}
 \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
 \email{trovato@corporation.com}
@@ -91,7 +120,7 @@
  \city{Doimukh}
  \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
  \country{India}}
- 
+
 \author{Huifen Chan}
 \affiliation{%
   \institution{Tsinghua University}
@@ -117,25 +146,30 @@
 \affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
 \email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
 
-%
-% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
-% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows the author to define a more concise list
-% of authors' names for this purpose.
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
 \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
 
-%
-% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the article.
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article.
 \begin{abstract}
-A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an article formatted for publication by ACM in 
-a conference proceedings or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this article presents
-and explains many of the common variations, as well as many of the formatting elements
-an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \end{abstract}
 
-%
-% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
-% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
-%
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
 \begin{CCSXML}
 <ccs2012>
  <concept>
@@ -166,46 +200,61 @@ an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
 \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
 
-%
-% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe the work being
-% presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
 \keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
 
-%
-% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation information and the body 
-% of the document, and typically spans the page. 
-%%\begin{teaserfigure}
-%%  \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
-%%  \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
-%%  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
-%%  \label{fig:teaser}
-%%\end{teaserfigure}
-
-%
-% This command processes the author and affiliation and title information and builds
-% the first part of the formatted document.
+
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
 \maketitle
 
 \section{Introduction}
-ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique features incorporated into this single new template.
-
-If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
-
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the author's own version, with {\it very} few changes to the source. 
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
 
 \section{Template Overview}
-As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready'' journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by selecting the appropriate {\it template style} and {\it template parameters}.
-
-This document will explain the major features of the document class. For further information, the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is available from \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
 
 \subsection{Template Styles}
 
-The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is the {\it template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
 \item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
@@ -222,96 +271,169 @@ The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf
 
 \subsection{Template Parameters}
 
-In addition to specifying the {\it template style} to be used in formatting your work, there are a number of {\it template parameters} which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list of these parameters can be found in the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
 
 Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
 \begin{itemize}
-\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind'' conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
-\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable for posting by the author.
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
 \item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
 \end{itemize}
 
-This document uses the following string as the first command in the source file: \verb|\documentclass[sigconf,screen]{acmart}|.
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+\verb|\documentclass[sigchi-a]{acmart}|.
 
 \section{Modifications}
 
-Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions, and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
 
-{\bf Your document will be returned to you for revision if modifications are discovered.}
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
 
 \section{Typefaces}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the ``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The ``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used, as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
 
 \section{Title Information}
 
-The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately - \url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the {\verb|subtitle|} command.
-Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
 
-If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title| command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \title[short title]{full title}
 \end{verbatim}
 
 \section{Authors and Affiliations}
 
-Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors' names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
 
-Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
   \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
   \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors of an article contributed equally to the work. 
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
 
-If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
 \end{verbatim}
-Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the page headers.
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
 
-The article template's documentation, available at  \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective use.
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
 
 \section{Rights Information}
 
-Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission, license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
-
-Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final document:
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
 \item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
 \item the conference information in the page header(s).
 \end{itemize}
 
-Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with each of the works.
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
 
 \section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
 
-Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online search. 
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
 
-The ACM Computing Classification System --- \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of classifiers and concepts that describe the computing discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source. 
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
 
-User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing the research being presented.
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
 
-CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts. 
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
 
 \section{Sectioning Commands}
 
-Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands: \verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and \verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering from the commands. 
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
 
-Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bf not allowed.}
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
 
 \section{Tables}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|'' package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing high-quality tables. 
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
 
-Table captions are placed {\it above} the table.
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
 
-Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the \textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again, detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
 
-Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
 
 \begin{margintable}
   \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
@@ -328,7 +450,14 @@ Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} i
 \end{tabular}
 \end{margintable}
 
-To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
 
 \begin{table*}
   \caption{Some Typical Commands}
@@ -346,20 +475,18 @@ To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, us
 
 \section{Math Equations}
 You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
-inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of
-the three are discussed in the next sections.
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
 
 \subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
-A formula that appears in the running text is called an
-inline or in-text formula.  It is produced by the
-\textbf{math} environment, which can be
-invoked with the usual \texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end}
-construction or with the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You
-can use any of the symbols and structures,
-from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
-\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a
-few examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how
-this equation:
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
 \begin{math}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{math},
@@ -372,10 +499,10 @@ text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
 environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
 \textbf{displaymath} environment.
 
-Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols
-and structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just
-give a couple of examples of display equations in context.
-First, consider the equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
 \begin{equation}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{equation}
@@ -393,21 +520,33 @@ just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
 
 \section{Figures}
 
-The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown in the example below.
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
 \begin{marginfigure}
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
-  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \& Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
   \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
 \end{marginfigure}
 
-Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should {\bf also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
 
-Figure captions are placed {\it below} the figure.
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
 
 \subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
 
-A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a figure in your article, place the command immediately before the \verb|\maketitle| command:
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \begin{teaserfigure}
     \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
@@ -418,27 +557,67 @@ A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed
 
 \section{Citations and Bibliographies}
 
-The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete --- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials (``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages, article DOI, etc. 
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
 
-The bibliography is included in your source document with these two commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
   \bibliography{bibfile}
 \end{verbatim}
-where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|'' suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
-
-Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the ``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this command in the {\bf preamble} (before ``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source: 
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
-\cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
-a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference, symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article) \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis: \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1) \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles) \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton: multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A couple of citations with DOIs: \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
 
 \section{Acknowledgments}
 
-Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment section, which is placed just before the reference section in your document. 
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
 
 This section has a special environment:
 \begin{verbatim}
@@ -446,59 +625,89 @@ This section has a special environment:
   ...
   \end{acks}
 \end{verbatim}
-so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure consistency in the spelling of the section heading. 
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
 
 Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
 
 \section{Appendices}
 
-If your work needs an appendix, add it before the ``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source document. 
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
 
 Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \appendix
 \end{verbatim}
-and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section and subsection identification method.
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
 
 \section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
 
-The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in the margin:
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
 \item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
 \item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
 \end{itemize}
 
-%
-% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures
-% the proper identification of the section in the article metadata, and the consistent spelling of the heading.
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
 \begin{acks}
 To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
 \end{acks}
 
-%
-% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and the bibliography file.
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
 \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
 \bibliography{sample-base}
 
-% 
-% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+%%
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
 \appendix
 
 \section{Research Methods}
 
 \subsection{Part One}
 
-Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper. 
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
 
 \subsection{Part Two}
 
-Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis. 
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
 
 \section{Online Resources}
 
-Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum. 
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
 
-Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar massa et mattis lacinia.
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
 
 \end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sample-sigchi-a.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi.pdf
index bc33a56a566..a8aae0be1dd 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi.tex
index a07df290e3f..cdcbfa3f44f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigchi.tex
@@ -1,59 +1,88 @@
-%
-% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+%%
+%% This is file `sample-sigchi.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% samples.dtx  (with options: `sigchi')
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from sample-sigchi.tex.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file samples.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%%
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
 \documentclass[sigchi]{acmart}
 
-%
-% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
 \AtBeginDocument{%
   \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
     \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
 
-% Rights management information. 
-% This information is sent to you when you complete the rights form.
-% These commands have SAMPLE values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
-% the commands and values with those provided to you when you complete the rights form.
-%
-% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
 \copyrightyear{2018}
 \acmYear{2018}
-\setcopyright{acmlicensed}
-\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
-\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection, June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
-\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
+
+%% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural
+  Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
+\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection,
+  June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
+\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
 
-%
-% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
-%\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
-%\acmJournal{TOG}
-%\acmYear{2018}\acmVolume{37}\acmNumber{4}\acmArticle{111}\acmMonth{8}
-%\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-
-%
-% Submission ID. 
-% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
-% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
-%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
-
-%
-% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and references. If you are preparing content for an event
-% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of citations and references. Uncommenting
-% the next command will enable that style.
-%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
-
-%
-% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID.
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
+%% Uncommenting
+%% the next command will enable that style.
+%%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
 \begin{document}
 
-%
-% The "title" command has an optional parameter, allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
 \title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
 
-%
-% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define the authors and their affiliations.
-% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
-% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
 \author{Ben Trovato}
 \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
 \email{trovato@corporation.com}
@@ -91,7 +120,7 @@
  \city{Doimukh}
  \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
  \country{India}}
- 
+
 \author{Huifen Chan}
 \affiliation{%
   \institution{Tsinghua University}
@@ -117,25 +146,30 @@
 \affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
 \email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
 
-%
-% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
-% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows the author to define a more concise list
-% of authors' names for this purpose.
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
 \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
 
-%
-% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the article.
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article.
 \begin{abstract}
-A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an article formatted for publication by ACM in 
-a conference proceedings or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this article presents
-and explains many of the common variations, as well as many of the formatting elements
-an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \end{abstract}
 
-%
-% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
-% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
-%
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
 \begin{CCSXML}
 <ccs2012>
  <concept>
@@ -166,46 +200,61 @@ an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
 \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
 
-%
-% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe the work being
-% presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
 \keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
 
-%
-% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation information and the body 
-% of the document, and typically spans the page. 
-\begin{teaserfigure}
-  \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
-  \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
-  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
-  \label{fig:teaser}
-\end{teaserfigure}
-
-%
-% This command processes the author and affiliation and title information and builds
-% the first part of the formatted document.
+
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
 \maketitle
 
 \section{Introduction}
-ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique features incorporated into this single new template.
-
-If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
-
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the author's own version, with {\it very} few changes to the source. 
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
 
 \section{Template Overview}
-As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready'' journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by selecting the appropriate {\it template style} and {\it template parameters}.
-
-This document will explain the major features of the document class. For further information, the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is available from \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
 
 \subsection{Template Styles}
 
-The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is the {\it template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
 \item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
@@ -222,96 +271,169 @@ The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf
 
 \subsection{Template Parameters}
 
-In addition to specifying the {\it template style} to be used in formatting your work, there are a number of {\it template parameters} which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list of these parameters can be found in the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
 
 Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
 \begin{itemize}
-\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind'' conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
-\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable for posting by the author.
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
 \item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
 \end{itemize}
 
-This document uses the following string as the first command in the source file: \verb|\documentclass[sigconf,screen]{acmart}|.
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+\verb|\documentclass[sigchi]{acmart}|.
 
 \section{Modifications}
 
-Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions, and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
 
-{\bf Your document will be returned to you for revision if modifications are discovered.}
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
 
 \section{Typefaces}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the ``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The ``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used, as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
 
 \section{Title Information}
 
-The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately - \url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the {\verb|subtitle|} command.
-Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
 
-If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title| command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \title[short title]{full title}
 \end{verbatim}
 
 \section{Authors and Affiliations}
 
-Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors' names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
 
-Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
   \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
   \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors of an article contributed equally to the work. 
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
 
-If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
 \end{verbatim}
-Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the page headers.
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
 
-The article template's documentation, available at  \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective use.
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
 
 \section{Rights Information}
 
-Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission, license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
-
-Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final document:
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
 \item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
 \item the conference information in the page header(s).
 \end{itemize}
 
-Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with each of the works.
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
 
 \section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
 
-Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online search. 
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
 
-The ACM Computing Classification System --- \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of classifiers and concepts that describe the computing discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source. 
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
 
-User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing the research being presented.
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
 
-CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts. 
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
 
 \section{Sectioning Commands}
 
-Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands: \verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and \verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering from the commands. 
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
 
-Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bf not allowed.}
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
 
 \section{Tables}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|'' package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing high-quality tables. 
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
 
-Table captions are placed {\it above} the table.
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
 
-Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the \textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again, detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
 
-Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
 
 \begin{table}
   \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
@@ -328,7 +450,14 @@ Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} i
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}
 
-To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
 
 \begin{table*}
   \caption{Some Typical Commands}
@@ -346,20 +475,18 @@ To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, us
 
 \section{Math Equations}
 You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
-inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of
-the three are discussed in the next sections.
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
 
 \subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
-A formula that appears in the running text is called an
-inline or in-text formula.  It is produced by the
-\textbf{math} environment, which can be
-invoked with the usual \texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end}
-construction or with the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You
-can use any of the symbols and structures,
-from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
-\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a
-few examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how
-this equation:
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
 \begin{math}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{math},
@@ -372,10 +499,10 @@ text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
 environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
 \textbf{displaymath} environment.
 
-Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols
-and structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just
-give a couple of examples of display equations in context.
-First, consider the equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
 \begin{equation}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{equation}
@@ -393,21 +520,33 @@ just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
 
 \section{Figures}
 
-The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown in the example below.
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
 \begin{figure}[h]
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
-  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \& Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
   \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
 \end{figure}
 
-Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should {\bf also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
 
-Figure captions are placed {\it below} the figure.
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
 
 \subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
 
-A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a figure in your article, place the command immediately before the \verb|\maketitle| command:
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \begin{teaserfigure}
     \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
@@ -418,27 +557,67 @@ A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed
 
 \section{Citations and Bibliographies}
 
-The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete --- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials (``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages, article DOI, etc. 
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
 
-The bibliography is included in your source document with these two commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
   \bibliography{bibfile}
 \end{verbatim}
-where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|'' suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
-
-Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the ``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this command in the {\bf preamble} (before ``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source: 
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
-\cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
-a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference, symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article) \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis: \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1) \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles) \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton: multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A couple of citations with DOIs: \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
 
 \section{Acknowledgments}
 
-Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment section, which is placed just before the reference section in your document. 
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
 
 This section has a special environment:
 \begin{verbatim}
@@ -446,59 +625,89 @@ This section has a special environment:
   ...
   \end{acks}
 \end{verbatim}
-so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure consistency in the spelling of the section heading. 
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
 
 Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
 
 \section{Appendices}
 
-If your work needs an appendix, add it before the ``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source document. 
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
 
 Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \appendix
 \end{verbatim}
-and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section and subsection identification method.
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
 
 \section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
 
-The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in the margin:
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
 \item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
 \item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
 \end{itemize}
 
-%
-% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures
-% the proper identification of the section in the article metadata, and the consistent spelling of the heading.
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
 \begin{acks}
 To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
 \end{acks}
 
-%
-% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and the bibliography file.
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
 \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
 \bibliography{sample-base}
 
-% 
-% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+%%
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
 \appendix
 
 \section{Research Methods}
 
 \subsection{Part One}
 
-Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper. 
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
 
 \subsection{Part Two}
 
-Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis. 
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
 
 \section{Online Resources}
 
-Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum. 
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
 
-Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar massa et mattis lacinia.
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
 
 \end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sample-sigchi.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigconf.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigconf.pdf
index 5975d59e3f3..94cda56899e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigconf.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigconf.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigconf.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigconf.tex
index d0f9b3831c9..2bb32369501 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigconf.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigconf.tex
@@ -1,59 +1,88 @@
-%
-% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+%%
+%% This is file `sample-sigconf.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% samples.dtx  (with options: `sigconf')
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from sample-sigconf.tex.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file samples.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%%
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
 \documentclass[sigconf]{acmart}
 
-%
-% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
 \AtBeginDocument{%
   \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
     \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
 
-% Rights management information. 
-% This information is sent to you when you complete the rights form.
-% These commands have SAMPLE values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
-% the commands and values with those provided to you when you complete the rights form.
-%
-% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
 \copyrightyear{2018}
 \acmYear{2018}
-\setcopyright{acmlicensed}
-\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
-\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection, June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
-\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
+
+%% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural
+  Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
+\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection,
+  June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
+\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
 
-%
-% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
-%\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
-%\acmJournal{TOG}
-%\acmYear{2018}\acmVolume{37}\acmNumber{4}\acmArticle{111}\acmMonth{8}
-%\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-
-%
-% Submission ID. 
-% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
-% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
-%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
-
-%
-% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and references. If you are preparing content for an event
-% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of citations and references. Uncommenting
-% the next command will enable that style.
-%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
-
-%
-% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID.
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
+%% Uncommenting
+%% the next command will enable that style.
+%%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
 \begin{document}
 
-%
-% The "title" command has an optional parameter, allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
 \title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
 
-%
-% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define the authors and their affiliations.
-% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
-% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
 \author{Ben Trovato}
 \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
 \email{trovato@corporation.com}
@@ -91,7 +120,7 @@
  \city{Doimukh}
  \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
  \country{India}}
- 
+
 \author{Huifen Chan}
 \affiliation{%
   \institution{Tsinghua University}
@@ -117,25 +146,30 @@
 \affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
 \email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
 
-%
-% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
-% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows the author to define a more concise list
-% of authors' names for this purpose.
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
 \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
 
-%
-% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the article.
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article.
 \begin{abstract}
-A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an article formatted for publication by ACM in 
-a conference proceedings or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this article presents
-and explains many of the common variations, as well as many of the formatting elements
-an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \end{abstract}
 
-%
-% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
-% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
-%
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
 \begin{CCSXML}
 <ccs2012>
  <concept>
@@ -166,46 +200,71 @@ an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
 \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
 
-%
-% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe the work being
-% presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
 \keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
 
-%
-% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation information and the body 
-% of the document, and typically spans the page. 
+%% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation
+%% information and the body of the document, and typically spans the
+%% page.
 \begin{teaserfigure}
   \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
   \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
-  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
+  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base
+  seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
   \label{fig:teaser}
 \end{teaserfigure}
 
-%
-% This command processes the author and affiliation and title information and builds
-% the first part of the formatted document.
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
 \maketitle
 
 \section{Introduction}
-ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique features incorporated into this single new template.
-
-If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
-
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the author's own version, with {\it very} few changes to the source. 
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
 
 \section{Template Overview}
-As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready'' journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by selecting the appropriate {\it template style} and {\it template parameters}.
-
-This document will explain the major features of the document class. For further information, the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is available from \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
 
 \subsection{Template Styles}
 
-The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is the {\it template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
 \item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
@@ -222,96 +281,169 @@ The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf
 
 \subsection{Template Parameters}
 
-In addition to specifying the {\it template style} to be used in formatting your work, there are a number of {\it template parameters} which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list of these parameters can be found in the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
 
 Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
 \begin{itemize}
-\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind'' conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
-\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable for posting by the author.
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
 \item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
 \end{itemize}
 
-This document uses the following string as the first command in the source file: \verb|\documentclass[sigconf,screen]{acmart}|.
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+\verb|\documentclass[sigconf]{acmart}|.
 
 \section{Modifications}
 
-Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions, and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
 
-{\bf Your document will be returned to you for revision if modifications are discovered.}
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
 
 \section{Typefaces}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the ``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The ``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used, as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
 
 \section{Title Information}
 
-The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately - \url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the {\verb|subtitle|} command.
-Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
 
-If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title| command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \title[short title]{full title}
 \end{verbatim}
 
 \section{Authors and Affiliations}
 
-Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors' names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
 
-Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
   \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
   \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors of an article contributed equally to the work. 
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
 
-If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
 \end{verbatim}
-Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the page headers.
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
 
-The article template's documentation, available at  \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective use.
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
 
 \section{Rights Information}
 
-Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission, license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
-
-Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final document:
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
 \item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
 \item the conference information in the page header(s).
 \end{itemize}
 
-Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with each of the works.
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
 
 \section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
 
-Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online search. 
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
 
-The ACM Computing Classification System --- \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of classifiers and concepts that describe the computing discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source. 
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
 
-User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing the research being presented.
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
 
-CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts. 
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
 
 \section{Sectioning Commands}
 
-Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands: \verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and \verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering from the commands. 
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
 
-Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bf not allowed.}
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
 
 \section{Tables}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|'' package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing high-quality tables. 
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
 
-Table captions are placed {\it above} the table.
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
 
-Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the \textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again, detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
 
-Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
 
 \begin{table}
   \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
@@ -328,7 +460,14 @@ Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} i
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}
 
-To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
 
 \begin{table*}
   \caption{Some Typical Commands}
@@ -346,20 +485,18 @@ To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, us
 
 \section{Math Equations}
 You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
-inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of
-the three are discussed in the next sections.
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
 
 \subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
-A formula that appears in the running text is called an
-inline or in-text formula.  It is produced by the
-\textbf{math} environment, which can be
-invoked with the usual \texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end}
-construction or with the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You
-can use any of the symbols and structures,
-from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
-\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a
-few examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how
-this equation:
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
 \begin{math}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{math},
@@ -372,10 +509,10 @@ text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
 environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
 \textbf{displaymath} environment.
 
-Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols
-and structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just
-give a couple of examples of display equations in context.
-First, consider the equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
 \begin{equation}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{equation}
@@ -393,21 +530,33 @@ just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
 
 \section{Figures}
 
-The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown in the example below.
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
 \begin{figure}[h]
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
-  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \& Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
   \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
 \end{figure}
 
-Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should {\bf also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
 
-Figure captions are placed {\it below} the figure.
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
 
 \subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
 
-A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a figure in your article, place the command immediately before the \verb|\maketitle| command:
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \begin{teaserfigure}
     \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
@@ -418,27 +567,67 @@ A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed
 
 \section{Citations and Bibliographies}
 
-The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete --- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials (``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages, article DOI, etc. 
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
 
-The bibliography is included in your source document with these two commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
   \bibliography{bibfile}
 \end{verbatim}
-where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|'' suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
-
-Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the ``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this command in the {\bf preamble} (before ``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source: 
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
-\cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
-a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference, symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article) \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis: \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1) \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles) \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton: multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A couple of citations with DOIs: \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
 
 \section{Acknowledgments}
 
-Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment section, which is placed just before the reference section in your document. 
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
 
 This section has a special environment:
 \begin{verbatim}
@@ -446,59 +635,89 @@ This section has a special environment:
   ...
   \end{acks}
 \end{verbatim}
-so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure consistency in the spelling of the section heading. 
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
 
 Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
 
 \section{Appendices}
 
-If your work needs an appendix, add it before the ``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source document. 
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
 
 Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \appendix
 \end{verbatim}
-and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section and subsection identification method.
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
 
 \section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
 
-The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in the margin:
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
 \item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
 \item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
 \end{itemize}
 
-%
-% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures
-% the proper identification of the section in the article metadata, and the consistent spelling of the heading.
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
 \begin{acks}
 To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
 \end{acks}
 
-%
-% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and the bibliography file.
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
 \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
 \bibliography{sample-base}
 
-% 
-% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+%%
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
 \appendix
 
 \section{Research Methods}
 
 \subsection{Part One}
 
-Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper. 
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
 
 \subsection{Part Two}
 
-Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis. 
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
 
 \section{Online Resources}
 
-Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum. 
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
 
-Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar massa et mattis lacinia.
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
 
 \end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sample-sigconf.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigplan.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigplan.pdf
index 36c1bc3d561..b23f3d50238 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigplan.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigplan.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigplan.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigplan.tex
index 510fea7b13b..27dbea6f273 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigplan.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-sigplan.tex
@@ -1,59 +1,88 @@
-%
-% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+%%
+%% This is file `sample-sigplan.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% samples.dtx  (with options: `sigplan')
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from sample-sigplan.tex.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file samples.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%%
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
 \documentclass[sigplan,screen]{acmart}
 
-%
-% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
 \AtBeginDocument{%
   \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
     \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
 
-% Rights management information. 
-% This information is sent to you when you complete the rights form.
-% These commands have SAMPLE values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
-% the commands and values with those provided to you when you complete the rights form.
-%
-% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
 \copyrightyear{2018}
 \acmYear{2018}
-\setcopyright{acmlicensed}
-\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
-\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection, June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
-\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
+
+%% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural
+  Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
+\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection,
+  June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
+\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
 
-%
-% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
-%\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
-%\acmJournal{TOG}
-%\acmYear{2018}\acmVolume{37}\acmNumber{4}\acmArticle{111}\acmMonth{8}
-%\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-
-%
-% Submission ID. 
-% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
-% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
-%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
-
-%
-% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and references. If you are preparing content for an event
-% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of citations and references. Uncommenting
-% the next command will enable that style.
-%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
-
-%
-% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID.
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
+%% Uncommenting
+%% the next command will enable that style.
+%%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
 \begin{document}
 
-%
-% The "title" command has an optional parameter, allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
 \title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
 
-%
-% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define the authors and their affiliations.
-% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
-% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
 \author{Ben Trovato}
 \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
 \email{trovato@corporation.com}
@@ -91,7 +120,7 @@
  \city{Doimukh}
  \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
  \country{India}}
- 
+
 \author{Huifen Chan}
 \affiliation{%
   \institution{Tsinghua University}
@@ -117,25 +146,30 @@
 \affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
 \email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
 
-%
-% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
-% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows the author to define a more concise list
-% of authors' names for this purpose.
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
 \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
 
-%
-% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the article.
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article.
 \begin{abstract}
-A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an article formatted for publication by ACM in 
-a conference proceedings or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this article presents
-and explains many of the common variations, as well as many of the formatting elements
-an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \end{abstract}
 
-%
-% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
-% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
-%
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
 \begin{CCSXML}
 <ccs2012>
  <concept>
@@ -166,46 +200,71 @@ an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
 \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
 
-%
-% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe the work being
-% presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
 \keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
 
-%
-% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation information and the body 
-% of the document, and typically spans the page. 
+%% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation
+%% information and the body of the document, and typically spans the
+%% page.
 \begin{teaserfigure}
   \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
   \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
-  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
+  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base
+  seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
   \label{fig:teaser}
 \end{teaserfigure}
 
-%
-% This command processes the author and affiliation and title information and builds
-% the first part of the formatted document.
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
 \maketitle
 
 \section{Introduction}
-ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique features incorporated into this single new template.
-
-If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
-
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the author's own version, with {\it very} few changes to the source. 
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
 
 \section{Template Overview}
-As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready'' journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by selecting the appropriate {\it template style} and {\it template parameters}.
-
-This document will explain the major features of the document class. For further information, the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is available from \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
 
 \subsection{Template Styles}
 
-The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is the {\it template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
 \item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
@@ -222,96 +281,169 @@ The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf
 
 \subsection{Template Parameters}
 
-In addition to specifying the {\it template style} to be used in formatting your work, there are a number of {\it template parameters} which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list of these parameters can be found in the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
 
 Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
 \begin{itemize}
-\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind'' conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
-\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable for posting by the author.
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
 \item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
 \end{itemize}
 
-This document uses the following string as the first command in the source file: \verb|\documentclass[sigconf,screen]{acmart}|.
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+\verb|\documentclass[sigplan,screen]{acmart}|.
 
 \section{Modifications}
 
-Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions, and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
 
-{\bf Your document will be returned to you for revision if modifications are discovered.}
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
 
 \section{Typefaces}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the ``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The ``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used, as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
 
 \section{Title Information}
 
-The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately - \url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the {\verb|subtitle|} command.
-Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
 
-If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title| command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \title[short title]{full title}
 \end{verbatim}
 
 \section{Authors and Affiliations}
 
-Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors' names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
 
-Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
   \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
   \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors of an article contributed equally to the work. 
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
 
-If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
 \end{verbatim}
-Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the page headers.
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
 
-The article template's documentation, available at  \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective use.
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
 
 \section{Rights Information}
 
-Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission, license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
-
-Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final document:
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
 \item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
 \item the conference information in the page header(s).
 \end{itemize}
 
-Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with each of the works.
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
 
 \section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
 
-Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online search. 
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
 
-The ACM Computing Classification System --- \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of classifiers and concepts that describe the computing discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source. 
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
 
-User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing the research being presented.
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
 
-CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts. 
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
 
 \section{Sectioning Commands}
 
-Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands: \verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and \verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering from the commands. 
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
 
-Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bf not allowed.}
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
 
 \section{Tables}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|'' package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing high-quality tables. 
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
 
-Table captions are placed {\it above} the table.
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
 
-Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the \textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again, detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
 
-Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
 
 \begin{table}
   \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
@@ -328,7 +460,14 @@ Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} i
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}
 
-To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
 
 \begin{table*}
   \caption{Some Typical Commands}
@@ -346,20 +485,18 @@ To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, us
 
 \section{Math Equations}
 You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
-inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of
-the three are discussed in the next sections.
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
 
 \subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
-A formula that appears in the running text is called an
-inline or in-text formula.  It is produced by the
-\textbf{math} environment, which can be
-invoked with the usual \texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end}
-construction or with the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You
-can use any of the symbols and structures,
-from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
-\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a
-few examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how
-this equation:
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
 \begin{math}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{math},
@@ -372,10 +509,10 @@ text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
 environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
 \textbf{displaymath} environment.
 
-Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols
-and structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just
-give a couple of examples of display equations in context.
-First, consider the equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
 \begin{equation}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{equation}
@@ -393,21 +530,33 @@ just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
 
 \section{Figures}
 
-The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown in the example below.
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
 \begin{figure}[h]
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
-  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \& Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
   \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
 \end{figure}
 
-Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should {\bf also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
 
-Figure captions are placed {\it below} the figure.
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
 
 \subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
 
-A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a figure in your article, place the command immediately before the \verb|\maketitle| command:
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \begin{teaserfigure}
     \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
@@ -418,27 +567,67 @@ A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed
 
 \section{Citations and Bibliographies}
 
-The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete --- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials (``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages, article DOI, etc. 
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
 
-The bibliography is included in your source document with these two commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
   \bibliography{bibfile}
 \end{verbatim}
-where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|'' suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
-
-Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the ``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this command in the {\bf preamble} (before ``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source: 
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
-\cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
-a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference, symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article) \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis: \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1) \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles) \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton: multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A couple of citations with DOIs: \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
 
 \section{Acknowledgments}
 
-Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment section, which is placed just before the reference section in your document. 
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
 
 This section has a special environment:
 \begin{verbatim}
@@ -446,59 +635,89 @@ This section has a special environment:
   ...
   \end{acks}
 \end{verbatim}
-so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure consistency in the spelling of the section heading. 
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
 
 Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
 
 \section{Appendices}
 
-If your work needs an appendix, add it before the ``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source document. 
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
 
 Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \appendix
 \end{verbatim}
-and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section and subsection identification method.
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
 
 \section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
 
-The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in the margin:
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
 \item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
 \item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
 \end{itemize}
 
-%
-% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures
-% the proper identification of the section in the article metadata, and the consistent spelling of the heading.
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
 \begin{acks}
 To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
 \end{acks}
 
-%
-% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and the bibliography file.
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
 \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
 \bibliography{sample-base}
 
-% 
-% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+%%
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
 \appendix
 
 \section{Research Methods}
 
 \subsection{Part One}
 
-Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper. 
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
 
 \subsection{Part Two}
 
-Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis. 
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
 
 \section{Online Resources}
 
-Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum. 
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
 
-Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar massa et mattis lacinia.
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
 
 \end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sample-sigplan.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-xelatex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-xelatex.pdf
index dd619e8243a..29a4cf8fb2f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-xelatex.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-xelatex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-xelatex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-xelatex.tex
index d0f9b3831c9..2efa559e5bb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-xelatex.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/sample-xelatex.tex
@@ -1,59 +1,88 @@
-%
-% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+%%
+%% This is file `sample-xelatex.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% samples.dtx  (with options: `sigconf')
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from sample-xelatex.tex.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file samples.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%%
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
 \documentclass[sigconf]{acmart}
 
-%
-% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
 \AtBeginDocument{%
   \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
     \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
 
-% Rights management information. 
-% This information is sent to you when you complete the rights form.
-% These commands have SAMPLE values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
-% the commands and values with those provided to you when you complete the rights form.
-%
-% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
 \copyrightyear{2018}
 \acmYear{2018}
-\setcopyright{acmlicensed}
-\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
-\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection, June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
-\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
+
+%% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural
+  Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY}
+\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection,
+  June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY}
+\acmPrice{15.00}
 \acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
 
-%
-% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
-%\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
-%\acmJournal{TOG}
-%\acmYear{2018}\acmVolume{37}\acmNumber{4}\acmArticle{111}\acmMonth{8}
-%\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
-
-%
-% Submission ID. 
-% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
-% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
-%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
-
-%
-% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and references. If you are preparing content for an event
-% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of citations and references. Uncommenting
-% the next command will enable that style.
-%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
-
-%
-% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID.
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
+%% Uncommenting
+%% the next command will enable that style.
+%%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
 \begin{document}
 
-%
-% The "title" command has an optional parameter, allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
 \title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
 
-%
-% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define the authors and their affiliations.
-% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
-% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
 \author{Ben Trovato}
 \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
 \email{trovato@corporation.com}
@@ -91,7 +120,7 @@
  \city{Doimukh}
  \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
  \country{India}}
- 
+
 \author{Huifen Chan}
 \affiliation{%
   \institution{Tsinghua University}
@@ -117,25 +146,30 @@
 \affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
 \email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
 
-%
-% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
-% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows the author to define a more concise list
-% of authors' names for this purpose.
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
 \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
 
-%
-% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the article.
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article.
 \begin{abstract}
-A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an article formatted for publication by ACM in 
-a conference proceedings or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this article presents
-and explains many of the common variations, as well as many of the formatting elements
-an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \end{abstract}
 
-%
-% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
-% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
-%
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
 \begin{CCSXML}
 <ccs2012>
  <concept>
@@ -166,46 +200,71 @@ an author may use in the preparation of the documentation of their work.
 \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
 \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
 
-%
-% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe the work being
-% presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
 \keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
 
-%
-% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation information and the body 
-% of the document, and typically spans the page. 
+%% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation
+%% information and the body of the document, and typically spans the
+%% page.
 \begin{teaserfigure}
   \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
   \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
-  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
+  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base
+  seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.}
   \label{fig:teaser}
 \end{teaserfigure}
 
-%
-% This command processes the author and affiliation and title information and builds
-% the first part of the formatted document.
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
 \maketitle
 
 \section{Introduction}
-ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique features incorporated into this single new template.
-
-If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
-
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the author's own version, with {\it very} few changes to the source. 
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
 
 \section{Template Overview}
-As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready'' journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by selecting the appropriate {\it template style} and {\it template parameters}.
-
-This document will explain the major features of the document class. For further information, the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is available from \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
 
 \subsection{Template Styles}
 
-The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is the {\it template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
 \item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
@@ -222,96 +281,169 @@ The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf
 
 \subsection{Template Parameters}
 
-In addition to specifying the {\it template style} to be used in formatting your work, there are a number of {\it template parameters} which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list of these parameters can be found in the {\it \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
 
 Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
 \begin{itemize}
-\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind'' conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
-\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable for posting by the author.
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
 \item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
 \end{itemize}
 
-This document uses the following string as the first command in the source file: \verb|\documentclass[sigconf,screen]{acmart}|.
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+\verb|\documentclass[sigconf]{acmart}|.
 
 \section{Modifications}
 
-Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions, and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
 
-{\bf Your document will be returned to you for revision if modifications are discovered.}
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
 
 \section{Typefaces}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the ``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The ``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used, as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
 
 \section{Title Information}
 
-The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately - \url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the {\verb|subtitle|} command.
-Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
 
-If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title| command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \title[short title]{full title}
 \end{verbatim}
 
 \section{Authors and Affiliations}
 
-Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors' names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
 
-Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
   \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
   \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors of an article contributed equally to the work. 
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
 
-If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
 \end{verbatim}
-Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the page headers.
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
 
-The article template's documentation, available at  \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective use.
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
 
 \section{Rights Information}
 
-Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission, license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
-
-Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final document:
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
 \item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
 \item the conference information in the page header(s).
 \end{itemize}
 
-Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with each of the works.
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
 
 \section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
 
-Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online search. 
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
 
-The ACM Computing Classification System --- \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of classifiers and concepts that describe the computing discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source. 
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
 
-User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing the research being presented.
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
 
-CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts. 
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
 
 \section{Sectioning Commands}
 
-Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands: \verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and \verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering from the commands. 
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
 
-Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bf not allowed.}
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
 
 \section{Tables}
 
-The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|'' package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing high-quality tables. 
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
 
-Table captions are placed {\it above} the table.
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
 
-Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the \textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again, detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
 
-Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
 
 \begin{table}
   \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
@@ -328,7 +460,14 @@ Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:freq} i
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}
 
-To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of this document.
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
 
 \begin{table*}
   \caption{Some Typical Commands}
@@ -346,20 +485,18 @@ To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's live area, us
 
 \section{Math Equations}
 You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
-inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of
-the three are discussed in the next sections.
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
 
 \subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
-A formula that appears in the running text is called an
-inline or in-text formula.  It is produced by the
-\textbf{math} environment, which can be
-invoked with the usual \texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end}
-construction or with the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You
-can use any of the symbols and structures,
-from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
-\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a
-few examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how
-this equation:
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
 \begin{math}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{math},
@@ -372,10 +509,10 @@ text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
 environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
 \textbf{displaymath} environment.
 
-Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols
-and structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just
-give a couple of examples of display equations in context.
-First, consider the equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
 \begin{equation}
   \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
 \end{equation}
@@ -393,21 +530,33 @@ just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
 
 \section{Figures}
 
-The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown in the example below.
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
 \begin{figure}[h]
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
-  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \& Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
   \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
 \end{figure}
 
-Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should {\bf also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
 
-Figure captions are placed {\it below} the figure.
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
 
 \subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
 
-A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a figure in your article, place the command immediately before the \verb|\maketitle| command:
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \begin{teaserfigure}
     \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
@@ -418,27 +567,67 @@ A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that are placed
 
 \section{Citations and Bibliographies}
 
-The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete --- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials (``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages, article DOI, etc. 
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
 
-The bibliography is included in your source document with these two commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
   \bibliography{bibfile}
 \end{verbatim}
-where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|'' suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
-
-Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the ``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this command in the {\bf preamble} (before ``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source: 
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
 \end{verbatim}
 
-Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
-\cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
-a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference, symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article) \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis: \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1) \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles) \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton: multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A couple of citations with DOIs: \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
 
 \section{Acknowledgments}
 
-Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment section, which is placed just before the reference section in your document. 
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
 
 This section has a special environment:
 \begin{verbatim}
@@ -446,59 +635,89 @@ This section has a special environment:
   ...
   \end{acks}
 \end{verbatim}
-so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure consistency in the spelling of the section heading. 
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
 
 Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
 
 \section{Appendices}
 
-If your work needs an appendix, add it before the ``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source document. 
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
 
 Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
 \begin{verbatim}
   \appendix
 \end{verbatim}
-and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section and subsection identification method.
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
 
 \section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
 
-The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in the margin:
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
 \item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
 \item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
 \end{itemize}
 
-%
-% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures
-% the proper identification of the section in the article metadata, and the consistent spelling of the heading.
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
 \begin{acks}
 To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
 \end{acks}
 
-%
-% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and the bibliography file.
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
 \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
 \bibliography{sample-base}
 
-% 
-% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+%%
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
 \appendix
 
 \section{Research Methods}
 
 \subsection{Part One}
 
-Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper. 
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
 
 \subsection{Part Two}
 
-Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis. 
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
 
 \section{Online Resources}
 
-Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum. 
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
 
-Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar massa et mattis lacinia.
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
 
 \end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sample-xelatex.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/samples.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/samples.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3e10249bab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/samples.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,744 @@
+%<*manuscript|acmsmall|acmlarge|acmtog|sigconf|authordraft|sigplan|sigchi|sigchi-a|acmsmall-conf>
+%% 
+%% The first command in your LaTeX source must be the \documentclass command.
+%<manuscript>\documentclass[manuscript,screen]{acmart}
+%<acmsmall|acmsmall-conf>\documentclass[acmsmall]{acmart}
+%<acmlarge>\documentclass[acmlarge]{acmart}
+%<acmtog>\documentclass[acmtog]{acmart}
+%<sigconf>\documentclass[sigconf]{acmart}
+%<authordraft>\documentclass[sigconf,authordraft]{acmart}
+%<sigplan>\documentclass[sigplan,screen]{acmart}
+%<sigchi>\documentclass[sigchi]{acmart}
+%<sigchi-a>\documentclass[sigchi-a]{acmart}
+
+%%
+%% \BibTeX command to typeset BibTeX logo in the docs
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \providecommand\BibTeX{{%
+    \normalfont B\kern-0.5em{\scshape i\kern-0.25em b}\kern-0.8em\TeX}}}
+
+%% Rights management information.  This information is sent to you
+%% when you complete the rights form.  These commands have SAMPLE
+%% values in them; it is your responsibility as an author to replace
+%% the commands and values with those provided to you when you
+%% complete the rights form.
+%
+\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
+\copyrightyear{2018}
+\acmYear{2018}
+\acmDOI{10.1145/1122445.1122456}
+
+%</manuscript|acmsmall|acmlarge|acmtog|sigconf|authordraft|sigplan|sigchi|sigchi-a|acmsmall-conf>
+%<*manuscript|sigconf|authordraft|sigplan|sigchi|sigchi-a|acmsmall-conf>
+%% These commands are for a PROCEEDINGS abstract or paper.
+\acmConference[Woodstock '18]{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural
+  Gaze Detection}{June 03--05, 2018}{Woodstock, NY} 
+\acmBooktitle{Woodstock '18: ACM Symposium on Neural Gaze Detection,
+  June 03--05, 2018, Woodstock, NY} 
+\acmPrice{15.00}
+\acmISBN{978-1-4503-9999-9/18/06}
+%</manuscript|sigconf|authordraft|sigplan|sigchi|sigchi-a|acmsmall-conf>
+
+%<*acmsmall|acmlarge|acmtog>
+%%
+%% These commands are for a JOURNAL article.
+%<acmsmall>\acmJournal{JACM}
+%<acmlarge>\acmJournal{POMACS}
+%<acmtog>\acmJournal{TOG}
+\acmVolume{37}
+\acmNumber{4}
+\acmArticle{111}
+\acmMonth{8}
+%</acmsmall|acmlarge|acmtog>
+%<*manuscript|acmsmall|acmlarge|acmtog|sigconf|authordraft|sigplan|sigchi|sigchi-a|acmsmall-conf>
+
+
+%%
+%% Submission ID. 
+%% Use this when submitting an article to a sponsored event. You'll
+%% receive a unique submission ID from the organizers
+%% of the event, and this ID should be used as the parameter to this command.
+%%\acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
+
+
+%%
+%% The majority of ACM publications use numbered citations and
+%% references.  The command \citestyle{authoryear} switches to the
+%% "author year" style.
+%%
+%% If you are preparing content for an event
+%% sponsored by ACM SIGGRAPH, you must use the "author year" style of
+%% citations and references.
+%<!acmtog>%% Uncommenting 
+%<!acmtog>%% the next command will enable that style.
+%<!acmtog>%%\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+%<acmtog>\citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+
+%%
+%% end of the preamble, start of the body of the document source.
+\begin{document}
+
+%%
+%% The "title" command has an optional parameter,
+%% allowing the author to define a "short title" to be used in page headers.
+\title{The Name of the Title is Hope}
+
+%%
+%% The "author" command and its associated commands are used to define
+%% the authors and their affiliations.
+%% Of note is the shared affiliation of the first two authors, and the
+%% "authornote" and "authornotemark" commands 
+%% used to denote shared contribution to the research.
+\author{Ben Trovato}
+\authornote{Both authors contributed equally to this research.}
+\email{trovato@corporation.com}
+\orcid{1234-5678-9012}
+\author{G.K.M. Tobin}
+\authornotemark[1]
+\email{webmaster@marysville-ohio.com}
+\affiliation{%
+  \institution{Institute for Clarity in Documentation}
+  \streetaddress{P.O. Box 1212}
+  \city{Dublin}
+  \state{Ohio}
+  \postcode{43017-6221}
+}
+
+\author{Lars Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld}
+\affiliation{%
+  \institution{The Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Group}
+  \streetaddress{1 Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Circle}
+  \city{Hekla}
+  \country{Iceland}}
+\email{larst@affiliation.org}
+
+\author{Valerie B\'eranger}
+\affiliation{%
+  \institution{Inria Paris-Rocquencourt}
+  \city{Rocquencourt}
+  \country{France}
+}
+
+\author{Aparna Patel}
+\affiliation{%
+ \institution{Rajiv Gandhi University}
+ \streetaddress{Rono-Hills}
+ \city{Doimukh}
+ \state{Arunachal Pradesh}
+ \country{India}}
+ 
+\author{Huifen Chan}
+\affiliation{%
+  \institution{Tsinghua University}
+  \streetaddress{30 Shuangqing Rd}
+  \city{Haidian Qu}
+  \state{Beijing Shi}
+  \country{China}}
+
+\author{Charles Palmer}
+\affiliation{%
+  \institution{Palmer Research Laboratories}
+  \streetaddress{8600 Datapoint Drive}
+  \city{San Antonio}
+  \state{Texas}
+  \postcode{78229}}
+\email{cpalmer@prl.com}
+
+\author{John Smith}
+\affiliation{\institution{The Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Group}}
+\email{jsmith@affiliation.org}
+
+\author{Julius P. Kumquat}
+\affiliation{\institution{The Kumquat Consortium}}
+\email{jpkumquat@consortium.net}
+
+%%
+%% By default, the full list of authors will be used in the page
+%% headers. Often, this list is too long, and will overlap 
+%% other information printed in the page headers. This command allows
+%% the author to define a more concise list 
+%% of authors' names for this purpose.
+\renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Trovato and Tobin, et al.}
+
+%%
+%% The abstract is a short summary of the work to be presented in the
+%% article. 
+\begin{abstract}
+  A clear and well-documented \LaTeX\ document is presented as an
+  article formatted for publication by ACM in a conference proceedings
+  or journal publication. Based on the ``acmart'' document class, this
+  article presents and explains many of the common variations, as well
+  as many of the formatting elements an author may use in the
+  preparation of the documentation of their work.
+\end{abstract}
+
+%%
+%% The code below is generated by the tool at http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm.
+%% Please copy and paste the code instead of the example below.
+%%
+\begin{CCSXML}
+<ccs2012>
+ <concept>
+  <concept_id>10010520.10010553.10010562</concept_id>
+  <concept_desc>Computer systems organization~Embedded systems</concept_desc>
+  <concept_significance>500</concept_significance>
+ </concept>
+ <concept>
+  <concept_id>10010520.10010575.10010755</concept_id>
+  <concept_desc>Computer systems organization~Redundancy</concept_desc>
+  <concept_significance>300</concept_significance>
+ </concept>
+ <concept>
+  <concept_id>10010520.10010553.10010554</concept_id>
+  <concept_desc>Computer systems organization~Robotics</concept_desc>
+  <concept_significance>100</concept_significance>
+ </concept>
+ <concept>
+  <concept_id>10003033.10003083.10003095</concept_id>
+  <concept_desc>Networks~Network reliability</concept_desc>
+  <concept_significance>100</concept_significance>
+ </concept>
+</ccs2012>
+\end{CCSXML}
+
+\ccsdesc[500]{Computer systems organization~Embedded systems}
+\ccsdesc[300]{Computer systems organization~Redundancy}
+\ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
+\ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
+
+%%
+%% Keywords. The author(s) should pick words that accurately describe
+%% the work being presented. Separate the keywords with commas.
+\keywords{datasets, neural networks, gaze detection, text tagging}
+
+%</manuscript|acmsmall|acmlarge|acmtog|sigconf|authordraft|sigplan|sigchi|sigchi-a|acmsmall-conf>
+%<*sigconf|authordraft|sigplan|acmsmall-conf>
+%% A "teaser" image appears between the author and affiliation
+%% information and the body of the document, and typically spans the
+%% page.
+\begin{teaserfigure}
+  \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
+  \caption{Seattle Mariners at Spring Training, 2010.}
+  \Description{Enjoying the baseball game from the third-base
+  seats. Ichiro Suzuki preparing to bat.} 
+  \label{fig:teaser}
+\end{teaserfigure}
+%</sigconf|authordraft|sigplan|acmsmall-conf>
+%<*manuscript|acmsmall|acmlarge|acmtog|sigconf|authordraft|sigplan|sigchi|sigchi-a|acmsmall-conf>
+
+%%
+%% This command processes the author and affiliation and title
+%% information and builds the first part of the formatted document.
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Introduction}
+ACM's consolidated article template, introduced in 2017, provides a
+consistent \LaTeX\ style for use across ACM publications, and
+incorporates accessibility and metadata-extraction functionality
+necessary for future Digital Library endeavors. Numerous ACM and
+SIG-specific \LaTeX\ templates have been examined, and their unique
+features incorporated into this single new template.
+
+If you are new to publishing with ACM, this document is a valuable
+guide to the process of preparing your work for publication. If you
+have published with ACM before, this document provides insight and
+instruction into more recent changes to the article template.
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can be used to prepare articles
+for any ACM publication --- conference or journal, and for any stage
+of publication, from review to final ``camera-ready'' copy, to the
+author's own version, with {\itshape very} few changes to the source.
+
+\section{Template Overview}
+As noted in the introduction, the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class can
+be used to prepare many different kinds of documentation --- a
+double-blind initial submission of a full-length technical paper, a
+two-page SIGGRAPH Emerging Technologies abstract, a ``camera-ready''
+journal article, a SIGCHI Extended Abstract, and more --- all by
+selecting the appropriate {\itshape template style} and {\itshape
+  template parameters}.
+
+This document will explain the major features of the document
+class. For further information, the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide} is
+available from
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}.
+
+\subsection{Template Styles}
+
+The primary parameter given to the ``\verb|acmart|'' document class is
+the {\itshape template style} which corresponds to the kind of publication
+or SIG publishing the work. This parameter is enclosed in square
+brackets and is a part of the {\verb|documentclass|} command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \documentclass[STYLE]{acmart}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Journals use one of three template styles. All but three ACM journals
+use the {\verb|acmsmall|} template style:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item {\verb|acmsmall|}: The default journal template style.
+\item {\verb|acmlarge|}: Used by JOCCH and TAP.
+\item {\verb|acmtog|}: Used by TOG.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The majority of conference proceedings documentation will use the {\verb|acmconf|} template style.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item {\verb|acmconf|}: The default proceedings template style.
+\item{\verb|sigchi|}: Used for SIGCHI conference articles.
+\item{\verb|sigchi-a|}: Used for SIGCHI ``Extended Abstract'' articles.
+\item{\verb|sigplan|}: Used for SIGPLAN conference articles.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Template Parameters}
+
+In addition to specifying the {\itshape template style} to be used in
+formatting your work, there are a number of {\itshape template parameters}
+which modify some part of the applied template style. A complete list
+of these parameters can be found in the {\itshape \LaTeX\ User's Guide.}
+
+Frequently-used parameters, or combinations of parameters, include:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item {\verb|anonymous,review|}: Suitable for a ``double-blind''
+  conference submission. Anonymizes the work and includes line
+  numbers. Use with the \verb|\acmSubmissionID| command to print the
+  submission's unique ID on each page of the work.
+\item{\verb|authorversion|}: Produces a version of the work suitable
+  for posting by the author.
+\item{\verb|screen|}: Produces colored hyperlinks.
+\end{itemize}
+
+This document uses the following string as the first command in the
+source file:
+%<manuscript>\verb|\documentclass[manuscript,screen]{acmart}|.
+%<acmsmall|acmsmall-conf>\verb|\documentclass[acmsmall]{acmart}|.
+%<acmlarge>\verb|\documentclass[acmlarge]{acmart}|.
+%<acmtog>\verb|\documentclass[acmtog]{acmart}|.
+%<sigconf>\verb|\documentclass[sigconf]{acmart}|.
+%<authordraft>\verb|\documentclass[sigconf,authordraft]{acmart}|.
+%<sigplan>\verb|\documentclass[sigplan,screen]{acmart}|.
+%<sigchi>\verb|\documentclass[sigchi]{acmart}|.
+%<sigchi-a>\verb|\documentclass[sigchi-a]{acmart}|.
+
+
+\section{Modifications}
+
+Modifying the template --- including but not limited to: adjusting
+margins, typeface sizes, line spacing, paragraph and list definitions,
+and the use of the \verb|\vspace| command to manually adjust the
+vertical spacing between elements of your work --- is not allowed.
+
+{\bfseries Your document will be returned to you for revision if
+  modifications are discovered.}
+
+\section{Typefaces}
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class requires the use of the
+``Libertine'' typeface family. Your \TeX\ installation should include
+this set of packages. Please do not substitute other typefaces. The
+``\verb|lmodern|'' and ``\verb|ltimes|'' packages should not be used,
+as they will override the built-in typeface families.
+
+\section{Title Information}
+
+The title of your work should use capital letters appropriately -
+\url{https://capitalizemytitle.com/} has useful rules for
+capitalization. Use the {\verb|title|} command to define the title of
+your work. If your work has a subtitle, define it with the
+{\verb|subtitle|} command.  Do not insert line breaks in your title.
+
+If your title is lengthy, you must define a short version to be used
+in the page headers, to prevent overlapping text. The \verb|title|
+command has a ``short title'' parameter:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \title[short title]{full title}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Authors and Affiliations}
+
+Each author must be defined separately for accurate metadata
+identification. Multiple authors may share one affiliation. Authors'
+names should not be abbreviated; use full first names wherever
+possible. Include authors' e-mail addresses whenever possible.
+
+Grouping authors' names or e-mail addresses, or providing an ``e-mail
+alias,'' as shown below, is not acceptable:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \author{Brooke Aster, David Mehldau}
+  \email{dave,judy,steve@university.edu}
+  \email{firstname.lastname@phillips.org}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \verb|authornote| and \verb|authornotemark| commands allow a note
+to apply to multiple authors --- for example, if the first two authors
+of an article contributed equally to the work.
+
+If your author list is lengthy, you must define a shortened version of
+the list of authors to be used in the page headers, to prevent
+overlapping text. The following command should be placed just after
+the last \verb|\author{}| definition:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{McCartney, et al.}
+\end{verbatim}
+Omitting this command will force the use of a concatenated list of all
+of the authors' names, which may result in overlapping text in the
+page headers.
+
+The article template's documentation, available at
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/proceedings-template}, has a
+complete explanation of these commands and tips for their effective
+use.
+
+\section{Rights Information}
+
+Authors of any work published by ACM will need to complete a rights
+form. Depending on the kind of work, and the rights management choice
+made by the author, this may be copyright transfer, permission,
+license, or an OA (open access) agreement.
+
+Regardless of the rights management choice, the author will receive a
+copy of the completed rights form once it has been submitted. This
+form contains \LaTeX\ commands that must be copied into the source
+document. When the document source is compiled, these commands and
+their parameters add formatted text to several areas of the final
+document:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the ``ACM Reference Format'' text on the first page.
+\item the ``rights management'' text on the first page.
+\item the conference information in the page header(s).
+\end{itemize}
+
+Rights information is unique to the work; if you are preparing several
+works for an event, make sure to use the correct set of commands with
+each of the works.
+
+\section{CCS Concepts and User-Defined Keywords}
+
+Two elements of the ``acmart'' document class provide powerful
+taxonomic tools for you to help readers find your work in an online
+search.
+
+The ACM Computing Classification System ---
+\url{https://www.acm.org/publications/class-2012} --- is a set of
+classifiers and concepts that describe the computing
+discipline. Authors can select entries from this classification
+system, via \url{https://dl.acm.org/ccs/ccs.cfm}, and generate the
+commands to be included in the \LaTeX\ source.
+
+User-defined keywords are a comma-separated list of words and phrases
+of the authors' choosing, providing a more flexible way of describing
+the research being presented.
+
+CCS concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all short- and
+full-length articles, and optional for two-page abstracts.
+
+\section{Sectioning Commands}
+
+Your work should use standard \LaTeX\ sectioning commands:
+\verb|section|, \verb|subsection|, \verb|subsubsection|, and
+\verb|paragraph|. They should be numbered; do not remove the numbering
+from the commands.
+
+Simulating a sectioning command by setting the first word or words of
+a paragraph in boldface or italicized text is {\bfseries not allowed.}
+
+\section{Tables}
+
+The ``\verb|acmart|'' document class includes the ``\verb|booktabs|''
+package --- \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs} --- for preparing
+high-quality tables.
+
+Table captions are placed {\itshape above} the table.
+
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best placement for
+them is typically the top of the page nearest their initial cite.  To
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and the
+table caption.  The contents of the table itself must go in the
+\textbf{tabular} environment, to be aligned properly in rows and
+columns, with the desired horizontal and vertical rules.  Again,
+detailed instructions on \textbf{tabular} material are found in the
+\textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.
+
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:freq} is included in the input file; compare the
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed output of
+this document.
+
+%<!sigchi-a>\begin{table}
+%<sigchi-a>\begin{margintable}
+  \caption{Frequency of Special Characters}
+  \label{tab:freq}
+  \begin{tabular}{ccl}
+    \toprule
+    Non-English or Math&Frequency&Comments\\
+    \midrule
+    \O & 1 in 1,000& For Swedish names\\
+    $\pi$ & 1 in 5& Common in math\\
+    \$ & 4 in 5 & Used in business\\
+    $\Psi^2_1$ & 1 in 40,000& Unexplained usage\\
+  \bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+%<!sigchi-a>\end{table}
+%<sigchi-a>\end{margintable}
+
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of the page's
+live area, use the environment \textbf{table*} to enclose the table's
+contents and the table caption.  As with a single-column table, this
+wide table will ``float'' to a location deemed more
+desirable. Immediately following this sentence is the point at which
+Table~\ref{tab:commands} is included in the input file; again, it is
+instructive to compare the placement of the table here with the table
+in the printed output of this document.
+
+\begin{table*}
+  \caption{Some Typical Commands}
+  \label{tab:commands}
+  \begin{tabular}{ccl}
+    \toprule
+    Command &A Number & Comments\\
+    \midrule
+    \texttt{{\char'134}author} & 100& Author \\
+    \texttt{{\char'134}table}& 300 & For tables\\
+    \texttt{{\char'134}table*}& 400& For wider tables\\
+    \bottomrule
+  \end{tabular}
+\end{table*}
+
+\section{Math Equations}
+You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display.  Each of the three are
+discussed in the next sections.
+
+\subsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an inline or
+in-text formula.  It is produced by the \textbf{math} environment,
+which can be invoked with the usual
+\texttt{{\char'134}begin\,\ldots{\char'134}end} construction or with
+the short form \texttt{\$\,\ldots\$}. You can use any of the symbols
+and structures, from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in
+\LaTeX~\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a few
+examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how this equation:
+\begin{math}
+  \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
+\end{math},
+set here in in-line math style, looks slightly different when
+set in display style.  (See next section).
+
+\subsection{Display Equations}
+A numbered display equation---one set off by vertical space from the
+text and centered horizontally---is produced by the \textbf{equation}
+environment. An unnumbered display equation is produced by the
+\textbf{displaymath} environment.
+
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols and
+structures available in \LaTeX\@; this section will just give a couple
+of examples of display equations in context.  First, consider the
+equation, shown as an inline equation above:
+\begin{equation}
+  \lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0
+\end{equation}
+Notice how it is formatted somewhat differently in
+the \textbf{displaymath}
+environment.  Now, we'll enter an unnumbered equation:
+\begin{displaymath}
+  \sum_{i=0}^{\infty} x + 1
+\end{displaymath}
+and follow it with another numbered equation:
+\begin{equation}
+  \sum_{i=0}^{\infty}x_i=\int_{0}^{\pi+2} f
+\end{equation}
+just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.
+
+\section{Figures}
+
+The ``\verb|figure|'' environment should be used for figures. One or
+more images can be placed within a figure. If your figure contains
+third-party material, you must clearly identify it as such, as shown
+in the example below.
+%<!sigchi-a>\begin{figure}[h]
+%<sigchi-a>\begin{marginfigure}
+  \centering
+  \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{sample-franklin}
+  \caption{1907 Franklin Model D roadster. Photograph by Harris \&
+    Ewing, Inc. [Public domain], via Wikimedia
+    Commons. (\url{https://goo.gl/VLCRBB}).}
+  \Description{The 1907 Franklin Model D roadster.}
+%<!sigchi-a>\end{figure}
+%<sigchi-a>\end{marginfigure}
+
+Your figures should contain a caption which describes the figure to
+the reader. Figure captions go below the figure. Your figures should
+{\bfseries also} include a description suitable for screen readers, to
+assist the visually-challenged to better understand your work.
+
+Figure captions are placed {\itshape below} the figure.
+
+\subsection{The ``Teaser Figure''}
+
+A ``teaser figure'' is an image, or set of images in one figure, that
+are placed after all author and affiliation information, and before
+the body of the article, spanning the page. If you wish to have such a
+figure in your article, place the command immediately before the
+\verb|\maketitle| command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \begin{teaserfigure}
+    \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
+    \caption{figure caption}
+    \Description{figure description}
+  \end{teaserfigure}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Citations and Bibliographies}
+
+The use of \BibTeX\ for the preparation and formatting of one's
+references is strongly recommended. Authors' names should be complete
+--- use full first names (``Donald E. Knuth'') not initials
+(``D. E. Knuth'') --- and the salient identifying features of a
+reference should be included: title, year, volume, number, pages,
+article DOI, etc.
+
+The bibliography is included in your source document with these two
+commands, placed just before the \verb|\end{document}| command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
+  \bibliography{bibfile}
+\end{verbatim}
+where ``\verb|bibfile|'' is the name, without the ``\verb|.bib|''
+suffix, of the \BibTeX\ file.
+
+Citations and references are numbered by default. A small number of
+ACM publications have citations and references formatted in the
+``author year'' style; for these exceptions, please include this
+command in the {\bfseries preamble} (before
+``\verb|\begin{document}|'') of your \LaTeX\ source:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+  Some examples.  A paginated journal article \cite{Abril07}, an
+  enumerated journal article \cite{Cohen07}, a reference to an entire
+  issue \cite{JCohen96}, a monograph (whole book) \cite{Kosiur01}, a
+  monograph/whole book in a series (see 2a in spec. document)
+  \cite{Harel79}, a divisible-book such as an anthology or compilation
+  \cite{Editor00} followed by the same example, however we only output
+  the series if the volume number is given \cite{Editor00a} (so
+  Editor00a's series should NOT be present since it has no vol. no.),
+  a chapter in a divisible book \cite{Spector90}, a chapter in a
+  divisible book in a series \cite{Douglass98}, a multi-volume work as
+  book \cite{Knuth97}, an article in a proceedings (of a conference,
+  symposium, workshop for example) (paginated proceedings article)
+  \cite{Andler79}, a proceedings article with all possible elements
+  \cite{Smith10}, an example of an enumerated proceedings article
+  \cite{VanGundy07}, an informally published work \cite{Harel78}, a
+  doctoral dissertation \cite{Clarkson85}, a master's thesis:
+  \cite{anisi03}, an online document / world wide web resource
+  \cite{Thornburg01, Ablamowicz07, Poker06}, a video game (Case 1)
+  \cite{Obama08} and (Case 2) \cite{Novak03} and \cite{Lee05} and
+  (Case 3) a patent \cite{JoeScientist001}, work accepted for
+  publication \cite{rous08}, 'YYYYb'-test for prolific author
+  \cite{SaeediMEJ10} and \cite{SaeediJETC10}. Other cites might
+  contain 'duplicate' DOI and URLs (some SIAM articles)
+  \cite{Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Boris / Barbara Beeton:
+  multi-volume works as books \cite{MR781536} and \cite{MR781537}. A
+  couple of citations with DOIs:
+  \cite{2004:ITE:1009386.1010128,Kirschmer:2010:AEI:1958016.1958018}. Online
+  citations: \cite{TUGInstmem, Thornburg01, CTANacmart}.
+
+\section{Acknowledgments}
+
+Identification of funding sources and other support, and thanks to
+individuals and groups that assisted in the research and the
+preparation of the work should be included in an acknowledgment
+section, which is placed just before the reference section in your
+document.
+
+This section has a special environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \begin{acks}
+  ...
+  \end{acks}
+\end{verbatim}
+so that the information contained therein can be more easily collected
+during the article metadata extraction phase, and to ensure
+consistency in the spelling of the section heading.
+
+Authors should not prepare this section as a numbered or unnumbered {\verb|\section|}; please use the ``{\verb|acks|}'' environment.
+
+\section{Appendices}
+
+If your work needs an appendix, add it before the
+``\verb|\end{document}|'' command at the conclusion of your source
+document.
+
+Start the appendix with the ``\verb|appendix|'' command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \appendix
+\end{verbatim}
+and note that in the appendix, sections are lettered, not
+numbered. This document has two appendices, demonstrating the section
+and subsection identification method.
+
+\section{SIGCHI Extended Abstracts}
+
+The ``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style (available only in \LaTeX\ and
+not in Word) produces a landscape-orientation formatted article, with
+a wide left margin. Three environments are available for use with the
+``\verb|sigchi-a|'' template style, and produce formatted output in
+the margin:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item {\verb|sidebar|}:  Place formatted text in the margin.
+\item {\verb|marginfigure|}: Place a figure in the margin.
+\item {\verb|margintable|}: Place a table in the margin.
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%
+%% The acknowledgments section is defined using the "acks" environment
+%% (and NOT an unnumbered section). This ensures the proper
+%% identification of the section in the article metadata, and the
+%% consistent spelling of the heading.
+\begin{acks}
+To Robert, for the bagels and explaining CMYK and color spaces.
+\end{acks}
+
+%%
+%% The next two lines define the bibliography style to be used, and
+%% the bibliography file.
+\bibliographystyle{ACM-Reference-Format}
+\bibliography{sample-base}
+
+%% 
+%% If your work has an appendix, this is the place to put it.
+\appendix
+
+\section{Research Methods}
+
+\subsection{Part One}
+
+Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Morbi
+malesuada, quam in pulvinar varius, metus nunc fermentum urna, id
+sollicitudin purus odio sit amet enim. Aliquam ullamcorper eu ipsum
+vel mollis. Curabitur quis dictum nisl. Phasellus vel semper risus, et
+lacinia dolor. Integer ultricies commodo sem nec semper.
+
+\subsection{Part Two}
+
+Etiam commodo feugiat nisl pulvinar pellentesque. Etiam auctor sodales
+ligula, non varius nibh pulvinar semper. Suspendisse nec lectus non
+ipsum convallis congue hendrerit vitae sapien. Donec at laoreet
+eros. Vivamus non purus placerat, scelerisque diam eu, cursus
+ante. Etiam aliquam tortor auctor efficitur mattis.
+
+\section{Online Resources}
+
+Nam id fermentum dui. Suspendisse sagittis tortor a nulla mollis, in
+pulvinar ex pretium. Sed interdum orci quis metus euismod, et sagittis
+enim maximus. Vestibulum gravida massa ut felis suscipit
+congue. Quisque mattis elit a risus ultrices commodo venenatis eget
+dui. Etiam sagittis eleifend elementum.
+
+Nam interdum magna at lectus dignissim, ac dignissim lorem
+rhoncus. Maecenas eu arcu ac neque placerat aliquam. Nunc pulvinar
+massa et mattis lacinia.
+
+\end{document}
+%</manuscript|acmsmall|acmlarge|acmtog|sigconf|authordraft|sigplan|sigchi|sigchi-a|acmsmall-conf>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/samples.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/samples.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b98cca55ab8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acmart/samples/samples.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+\def\batchfile{samples.ins}
+\input docstrip
+\keepsilent
+\showprogress
+
+
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
+\generate{%
+  \file{sample-manuscript.tex}{\from{samples.dtx}{manuscript}}
+  \file{sample-acmsmall.tex}{\from{samples.dtx}{acmsmall}}
+  \file{sample-acmlarge.tex}{\from{samples.dtx}{acmlarge}}
+  \file{sample-acmtog.tex}{\from{samples.dtx}{acmtog}}
+  \file{sample-sigconf.tex}{\from{samples.dtx}{sigconf}}
+  \file{sample-authordraft.tex}{\from{samples.dtx}{authordraft}}
+  \file{sample-xelatex.tex}{\from{samples.dtx}{sigconf}}
+  \file{sample-sigplan.tex}{\from{samples.dtx}{sigplan}}
+  \file{sample-sigchi.tex}{\from{samples.dtx}{sigchi}}
+  \file{sample-sigchi-a.tex}{\from{samples.dtx}{sigchi-a}}
+  \file{sample-acmsmall-conf.tex}{\from{samples.dtx}{acmsmall-conf}}
+}
+